Introduction 4
Instrument Cluster 12
Warning lights and chimes 12
Gauges 17
Message center 18
Entertainment Systems 31
AM/FM stereo with CDX6/MP3 31
Auxiliary input jack (Line in) 39
USB port 41
Satellite radio information 44
Navigation system 47
SYNC威 47
Climate Controls 48
Dual automatic temperature control 48
Navigation system based climate control 51
Rear window defroster 55
Lights 56
Headlamps 56
Turn signal control 63
Bulb replacement 64
Driver Controls 68
Windshield wiper/washer control 68
Steering wheel adjustment 69
Power windows 74
Mirrors 77
Speed control 79
Adaptive cruise control 81
Moon roof 91
Table of Contents
1
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks and Security 104
Keys 104
Locks 106
Anti-theft system 124
Seating and Safety Restraints 135
Seating 135
Safety restraints 147
Airbags 161
Child restraints 176
Tires, Wheels and Loading 193
Tire information 193
Tire inflation 195
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 208
Vehicle loading 214
Trailer towing 220
Recreational towing 222
Driving 224
Starting 224
Brakes 232
AdvanceTrac威 234
Transmission operation 240
Forward and reverse sensing system 244
Rear-view camera system 247
All wheel drive 257
Roadside Emergencies 265
Getting roadside assistance 265
Hazard flasher control 266
Fuses and relays 267
Changing tires 275
Wheel lug nut torque 282
Jump starting 283
Wrecker towing 289
Table of Contents
2
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance 291
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) 297
Reporting safety defects (Canada only) 297
Cleaning 298
Maintenance and Specifications 306
Engine compartment 308
Engine oil 311
Battery 314
Engine coolant 316
Fuel information 322
Air filter(s) 337
Part numbers 339
Maintenance product specifications and capacities 340
Engine data 343
Accessories 347
Ford Extended Service Plan 349
Index 0
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2009 Ford Motor Company
Table of Contents
3
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Lincoln. Please take the time to
get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The
more you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the
safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is
an integral part of the vehicle.
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Introduction
4
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules, seat belt
pretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material
– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 1,000 miles (1,600 km) before towing a
trailer. For more detailed information about towing a trailer, refer to
Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils since
these additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil
usage.
Introduction
5
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty
Guide/Customer Information Guide that is provided to you along with
your Owner’s Guide.
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
WARNING: Please read the section Airbag Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing
your vehicle. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC威
Vehicle Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information
may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford
authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be
used for any purpose. See your SYNC威 supplement for more information.
Introduction
6
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are
capable of collecting and storing data during a crash or near
crash event. The recorded information may assist in the
investigation of such an event. The modules may record
information about both the vehicle and the occupants, potentially
including information such as:
• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were
buckled;
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or the brake pedal;
• how fast the vehicle was traveling;
• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel; and
• longitude and latitude of vehicle at last location, using GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors.
To access this information, special equipment must be directly
connected to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information
without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court order or
where required by law enforcement, other government authorities
or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties
may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada. To the extent that any law
pertaining to Event Data Recording applies to SYNC威 or its
features, please note the following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped)
is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through any paired and
connected cell phone, disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag
or, in certain vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of
electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators the vehicle
location, and/or other details about the vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not
activate the feature. See your SYNC威 supplement for more
information. Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions
and Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s
current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
Introduction
7
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
information”) only to help provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches you request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not activate
the service. Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses to
provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel
information. For more information, see Traffic, Directions and
Information, Terms and Conditions. See your SYNC威 supplement
for more information.
CELL PHONE USE
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in-vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Introduction
8
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
EXPORT UNIQUE (NON–UNITED STATES/CANADA) VEHICLE
SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the features and options that
are described in this Owner’s Guide. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market
unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
Owner’s Guide is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Guide for all other required
information and warnings.
Introduction
9
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert
See Owner’s Guide
Fasten Safety Belt Airbag - Front
Airbag - Side
Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Child Seat Tether
Anchor
Brake System
Anti-Lock Brake System Parking Brake System
Brake Fluid -
Non-Petroleum Based
Parking Aid System
Stability Control System Speed Control
Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher
Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment
Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe
Windshield
Defrost/Demist
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
Introduction
10
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Windows
Front/Rear
Power Window Lockout
Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock
Interior Luggage
Compartment Release
Panic Alarm Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Do Not Open When Hot Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid
Explosive Gas Fan Warning
Power Steering Fluid
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
MAX
MIN
Service Engine Soon Engine Air Filter
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Jack
Check Fuel Cap
Low Tire Pressure
Warning
Introduction
11
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause extensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulbs work. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning light for additional information.
Note: Some warning lights are
reconfigurable telltale (RTT)
indicator lights and will illuminate in
the message center. These lights
function the same as the other
warning lights.
Charging system (RTT):
Illuminates when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there
may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Engine oil pressure (RTT):
Illuminates when the oil pressure
falls below the normal range, refer
to Engine oil in the Maintenance
and Specifications chapter.
Instrument Cluster
12
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Engine coolant temperature
(RTT): Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let cool. Refer
to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Low fuel (RTT): Illuminates when
the fuel level in the fuel tank is at
or near empty. Refer to Fuel gauge
in this chapter.
Low washer fluid (RTT):
Illuminates when the washer level in
the washer fluid reservoir is low.
Throttle Control/Transmission
(RTT): Illuminates when a
powertrain or an AWD fault has
been detected. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Door ajar (RTT): Illuminates when
the ignition is in the run position
and any door is open.
Trunk ajar (RTT): Illuminates in
the message center display when
the ignition is in the run position
and the trunk is open.
Service engine soon: The Service
engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned on to check the bulb and to
indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
testing. Normally, the ⬙Service engine soon⬙ light will stay on until the
engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present.
However, if after 15 seconds the ⬙Service engine soon⬙ light blinks eight
times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. See the
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Instrument Cluster
13
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board
Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On
board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.
Brake system warning light: To
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned on when the
engine is not running, or in a position between on and start, or by
applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned on. If the brake
system warning light does not illuminate at this time, seek service
immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination after releasing the
parking brake indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system
malfunction and the brake system should be inspected immediately by
your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.
Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer. Driving extended
distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and
the risk of personal injury.
Anti-lock brake system: If the
ABS light stays illuminated or
continues to flash, a malfunction has
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake
warning light also is illuminated.
P!
BRAKE
ABS
Instrument Cluster
14
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Airbag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when the ignition is
turned on, continues to flash or
remains on, have the system
serviced immediately by your authorized dealer. A chime will sound if
there is a malfunction in the indicator light.
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A Belt-Minder威
chime will also sound to remind you
to fasten your safety belt. Refer to
the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter to activate/deactivate the Belt-Minder威 chime feature.
AdvanceTrac威/Traction
Control™: Illuminates when the
AdvanceTrac威/Traction Control™ is
active. If the light remains on, have
the system serviced immediately,
refer to the Driving chapter for more information.
AdvanceTrac威/Traction
Control™ off light: Illuminates
when the AdvanceTrac威/Traction
Control™ has been disabled by the
driver. Refer to the Driving chapter
for more information.
Low tire pressure warning:
Illuminates when your tire pressure
is low. If the light remains on at
start up or while driving, the tire
pressure should be checked. Refer
to Inflating your tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. When
the ignition is first turned to on, the light will illuminate for three
seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light does not turn on or
begins to flash, have the system inspected by your authorized dealer. For
more information on this system, refer to Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
(if equipped): Illuminates when
there is a vehicle in front of you.
Refer to Adaptive cruise control in
the Driver Controls chapter for
more information.
OFF
Instrument Cluster
15
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Speed control: Illuminates when
the speed control is engaged or
when the ACC is engaged without
following a vehicle. Turns off when
the speed control system is
disengaged or when the ACC is
activated.
Anti-theft system: Flashes when
the SecuriLock威 Passive Anti-theft
System has been activated.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
Heads up display (if equipped):
A red bar will illuminate on the
windshield in certain instances when
using adaptive cruise control and/or
the collision warning system. It will
also illuminate momentarily when
you start your vehicle to make sure the display works. See the Driving
chapter for more information.
Key-in-ignition warning chime (if equipped): Sounds when the key
is left in the ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver’s door
is opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key [if equipped] is not in the
ignition) and the driver’s door is opened.
Parking brake on chime: Sounds when the parking brake is left on and
the vehicle is driven. If the warning stays on after the park brake is off,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Instrument Cluster
16
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GAUGES
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed.
Engine coolant temperature
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If the needle moves close
to the “H” range, the engine is
overheating. Stop the vehicle as
soon as safely possible, switch off the engine and let the engine
cool.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
Instrument Cluster
17
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is on). The fuel gauge may vary
slightly when the vehicle is in
motion or on a grade.
The FUEL icon and arrow indicates
which side of the vehicle the fuel
filler door is located.
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
Tachometer: Indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale may damage the engine.
Odometer: Registers the total miles
(kilometers) of the vehicle. Refer to
Message center in the Instrument
cluster chapter on how to switch
the display from Metric to English.
Trip odometer: See TRIP A/B under Message center in this chapter.
MESSAGE CENTER
Your vehicle’s message center allows you to configure/personalize certain
vehicle options to suit your needs.
The message center is also capable of monitoring many vehicle systems
and will alert you to potential vehicle problems and various conditions
with an informational message followed by a long indicator chime.
The message center display is located in the instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster
18
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Info
Press the INFO button repeatedly to
cycle through the following features:
TRIP A/B
Registers the distance of individual journeys. Press and release INFO
until the A or B trip appears in the display (this represents the trip
mode). Press and hold RESET until it resets.
Refer to UNITS later in this section to switch the display from Metric to
English.
MYKEY MILES (km) (If programmed)
For more information, refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security
chapter.
MILES (km) TO E
This displays an estimate of approximately how far you can drive with
the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to
correctly detect the added fuel.
LOW FUEL LEVEL will display when you have approximately 50 miles
(80 km), to empty. Press RESET to clear this warning message. It will
return at approximately 25 miles (40 km), 10 miles (16 km) and 0 miles
(0 km) miles to empty.
Distance to empty is calculated using a running average fuel economy,
which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km).
This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display. The
running average fuel economy is re-initialized to a factory default value if
the battery is disconnected.
AVG MPG (L/100km)
Average fuel economy displays your average fuel economy in miles/gallon
or liters/100 km.
If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing distance traveled
by gallons of fuel used (liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled),
your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons:
• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
Instrument Cluster
19
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
To determine your average highway fuel economy, do the following:
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press RESET (press and hold RESET for two seconds
in order to reset the function) after setting the speed control to get
accurate highway fuel economy readings.
For more information refer to Essentials of good fuel economy in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
MPG (L/km)
This displays instantaneous fuel economy as a bar graph ranging from ↓
poor economy to ↑ excellent economy.
Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy.
When your vehicle is not moving, this function shows ↓, one or no bars
illuminated. Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset.
TIMER
Timer displays the trip elapsed drive time.
To operate, do the following:
1. Press and release RESET in order to start the timer.
2. Press and release RESET to pause the timer.
3. Press and hold RESET until the timer resets.
Blank Screen
The message center display will be blank after cycling through all of the
Info menu items.
System check and vehicle feature customization
Press the SETUP button repeatedly
to cycle the message center through
the following features:
RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK
When this message appears, press the RESET button and the message
center will begin to cycle through the following systems and provide a
status of the item if needed.
Instrument Cluster
20
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
1. OIL LIFE
2. WASHER FLUID LEVEL
3. DOOR AJAR STATUS
4. TRUNK AJAR/CLOSED
5. BRAKE SYSTEM
6. TIRE PRESSURE
7. FUEL LEVEL
8. MYKEY DISTANCE (If MyKey™ is programmed)
9. MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED
10. ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED
Note: Some systems show a message only if a condition is present.
OIL LIFE
This displays the remaining oil life.
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center and
according to the recommended maintenance schedule. USE ONLY
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change
(approximately 7,500 miles [12,000 km] or 12 months) perform the
following:
1. Press and release SETUP to display “OIL LIFE XXX% HOLD RESET =
NEW”.
2. Press and hold RESET for two seconds and release to reset the oil life
to 100%.
Note: To change oil life 100% miles value from 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
or 12 months to another value, proceed to Step 3.
3. Once “OIL LIFE SET TO XXX%” is displayed, release and press
RESET to change the Oil Life Start Value. Each release and press will
reduce the value by 10%.
Note: Oil life start value of 100% equals 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
12 months. For example, setting oil life start value to 60% sets the oil
life start value to 4,500 miles (7,200 km) and 219 days.
UNITS
Displays the current units in English or Metric.
Press RESET to change between English and Metric.
Instrument Cluster
21
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AUTO HIGH BEAM (if equipped)
This feature automatically turns on your high beams if it is dark enough
and no other traffic is present.
Press RESET to turn it off or on.
AUTOLAMP
This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the
ignition is switched off.
Press RESET to select the new Autolamp delay values of 0, 10, 20, 30,
60, 90, 120 or 180 seconds.
AUTOLOCK
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is
shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.
Press RESET to turn it off or on.
AUTOUNLOCK
This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver’s
door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off.
Press RESET to turn it off or on.
COLLISION WARN GAP (if equipped)
This allows you to adjust the sensitivity setting of the collision warning
system. See Collision warning system in the Driving chapter for more
information.
Press RESET to change the sensitivity setting from high sensitivity <– –
– – –> to low sensitivity <–>.
COLLISION WARN CHIME (if equipped)
This feature warns the driver with an audible chime during a possible
collision. See Collision warning system in the Driving chapter for
more information.
Press RESET to turn the warning chime on or off. The system will revert
to chime on each time the vehicle is started. The heads up display and/or
chime will activate briefly to confirm the last setting.
COLLISION WARN SYSTEM (if equipped)
This feature warns the driver during a possible collision. See Collision
warning system in the Driving chapter for more information.
Press RESET to turn the collision warning system on or off. The system
will revert to on each time the vehicle is started. The heads up display
and/or chime will activate briefly to confirm the last setting.
Instrument Cluster
22
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
EASY ENTRY
This feature automatically moves the driver’s seat backwards for easy
exit/entry from the vehicle.
Press RESET to turn it off or on.
REAR PARK AID (if equipped)
This feature sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear
bumper, and functions only when R (Reverse) gear is selected.
Press RESET to turn it off or on.
FRONT PARK AID (if equipped)
This feature sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the front
bumper.
Press RESET to turn it off or on.
CREATE MYKEY / MYKEY SETUP/ CLEAR MYKEY
For more information refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security
chapter.
LANGUAGE = ENGLISH / SPANISH / FRENCH
Allows you to choose which language the message center will display in.
Selectable languages are English, Spanish, or French.
Waiting four seconds or pressing the RESET button cycles the message
center through each of the language choices.
Press and hold RESET for two seconds to set the language choice.
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages.
Types of messages and warnings:
• Some messages will appear briefly to inform you of something you
may need to take action on or be informed of.
• Some messages will appear once and then again when the vehicle is
restarted.
Instrument Cluster
23
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Some messages will reappear after clearing or being reset if a problem
or condition is still present and needs your attention.
• Some messages can be acknowledged and reset by pressing RESET.
This allows you to use the full message center functionality by clearing
the message.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the driver’s door is not
completely closed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the passenger side door
is not completely closed.
REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the rear left door is not
completely closed.
REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the rear right door is
not completely closed.
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED — Displayed when the parking brake is set,
the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph
(5 km/h). If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
FUEL LEVEL LOW — Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel
condition.
CHECK FUEL FILL INLET — Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may
not be properly closed. Refer to Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system in
the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM — Displayed when the brake system needs
servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CHECK PARK AID (if equipped) — Displayed when park aid is
disabled and may need service.
CHECK FRONT PARK AID (if equipped) — Displayed when the
front park aid is disabled and may need service.
CHECK REAR PARK AID (if equipped) — Displayed when the rear
park aid is disabled and may need service.
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW — Indicates the brake fluid level is low
and the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake
fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
WASHER FLUID LEVEL LOW — Indicates the washer fluid reservoir
is less than one quarter full. Check the washer fluid level. Refer to
Windshield washer fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter.
Instrument Cluster
24
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
LOW TIRE PRESSURE — Displayed when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT — Displayed when the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, have the system inspected by your authorized
dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT — Displayed when a tire pressure
sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more
information on how the system operates under these conditions, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
POWER STEERING ASSIST FAULT — The power steering system
has disabled power steering assist due to a system error; service is
required.
SERVICE POWER STEERING — The power steering system has
detected a condition that requires service.
SERVICE POWER STEERING NOW — The power steering system
has detected a condition that requires service immediately.
TRUNK AJAR — Displayed when the trunk is not completely closed.
REMOVE OBJECTS NEAR PASS SEAT — Displayed when objects
are by the passenger seat. After the objects are moved away from the
seat, if the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
AWD OFF (if equipped) — Displayed when the AWD system has been
automatically disabled to protect itself. This is caused by operating the
vehicle with the compact spare tire installed or if the system is
overheating. The AWD system will resume normal function and clear this
message after driving a short distance with the road tire re-installed or
after the system is allowed to cool.
CHECK AWD (if equipped) — Displayed in conjunction with the
Throttle Control/Transmission/AWD
light when the AWD system is
not operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
OIL LIFE CHANGE SOON — Displayed when the engine oil life
remaining is 10% or less.
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — Displayed when the oil life left reaches
0%.
Instrument Cluster
25
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INTKEY COULD NOT PROGRAM — Displayed when an attempt is
made to program a fifth integrated key to the Remote keyless entry
system. For more information on integrated key, refer to the Locks and
Security chapter.
CRUISE ON RADAR READY (if equipped) — Displayed when the
driver pressed the cruise On/Off control and ACC was off.
CRUISE OFF (if equipped) — Displayed when the driver pressed the
Cruise On/Off control and ACC was on.
SET XXX MPH GAP ACC GAP (if equipped) — Displayed when
ACC is active and driver has selected a GAP setting using the steering
wheel control <---> button.
CRUISE CANCELED (if equipped) — Displayed when the ACC
system has been turned off by applying the vehicle’s brakes.
CRUISE OVERRIDE (if equipped) — Displayed when the accelerator
pedal is being pressed while ACC is active.
CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE (if equipped) — Displayed when a system
malfunction is preventing ACC from engaging.
CRUISE MALFUNCTION (if equipped) — Displayed when a radar
malfunction is preventing the ACC from engaging.
CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE SENSOR BLOCKED SEE MANUAL (if
equipped) — Displayed when the radar is blocked because of poor
radar visibility due to bad weather or ice/mud/water in front of radar.
Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve.
COLLISION WARN MALFUNCTION (if equipped) — Displayed
when there is a system malfunction with the collision warning system.
The system will be disabled.
COLLISION WARN NOT AVAILABLE (if equipped) — Displayed
when there is a system malfunction with the collision warning system.
The system will be disabled.
COLLISION WARN NOT AVAILABLE SENSOR BLOCKED SEE
MANUAL (if equipped) — Displayed when the collision warning
system radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad
weather or ice/mud/water in front of the radar. Driver can typically clean
the sensor to resolve.
PRESS BRAKE TO START (if equipped) — Displayed when the
start/stop button is pressed without the brake pedal being applied. This
is a reminder that the brake pedal must be applied when the start/stop
button is pressed in order to start the engine.
Instrument Cluster
26
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SHIFT TO PARK (if equipped) — Displayed when the start/stop
button is pressed to shut off the engine with the shift select lever in any
position other than P (Park). Refer to Fast restart feature in Push
button start system in the Driving chapter for more information.
NO KEY DETECTED (if equipped) — Displayed if the Intelligent
Access Key is not detected by the system in the following three
scenarios:
• When the start/stop button is pressed in an attempt to either start the
engine or cycle through the ignition states.
• When the engine is running and a door is opened then closed.
• When the vehicle’s speed exceeds 10 mph (16 km/h) for the first time
after starting. Refer to Push button start system in the Driving chapter
for more information.
RESTART NOW OR KEY IS NEEDED (if equipped) — Displayed
when the start/stop button is pressed to shut off the engine and a
Intelligent Access Key is not detected inside the vehicle. Refer to Push
button start system in the Driving chapter for more information.
ACCESSORY POWER ACTIVE (if equipped) — Displayed when the
vehicle is in the accessory ignition state.
STARTING SYSTEM FAULT (if equipped) — This message is
displayed when there is a problem with your vehicle’s starting security
system; your vehicle will not be able to start. See your authorized dealer
for service.
KEY PROGRAMMED 3 KEYS TOTAL (if equipped) — Displayed
during spare key programming, when a third Intelligent Access Key is
programmed to the system.
KEY PROGRAMMED 4 KEYS TOTAL (if equipped) — Displayed
during spare key programming, when a fourth Intelligent Access Key is
programmed to the system.
MAX # OF KEYS LEARNED (if equipped) — Displayed during spare
key programming, after a fourth Intelligent Access Key is programmed or
upon entering spare key programming mode with four Intelligent Access
Keys already programmed to the vehicle.
MY KEY ACTIVE DRIVE SAFELY — Displayed at startup when
MyKey™ is in use. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter
for more information.
KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM — Displayed when an attempt is made
to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys. Refer to MyKey™ in
the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
Instrument Cluster
27
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
VEHICLE SPEED 80 MPH MAX — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
use and the Admin has enabled the MyKey speed limit and the vehicle
speed is 80 mph (130 km/h). Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and
Security chapter for more information.
SPEED LIMITED TO 80 MPH — Displayed when starting the vehicle
and MyKey™ is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on. Refer to
MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
CHECK SPEED DRIVE SAFELY — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
use and the optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds a preselected
speed. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for more
information.
VEHICLE NEAR TOP SPEED — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in use
and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching
80 mph (130 km/h). Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security
chapter for more information.
TOP SPEED MY KEY SETTING — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is 80 mph
(130 km/h). Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for
more information.
BUCKLE UP TO UNMUTE AUDIO — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
use and Belt-Minder is activated. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and
Security chapter for more information.
ADVTRAC ON MYKEY SETTING — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
use when trying to disable the AdvanceTrac威 system and the optional
setting is on. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for
more information.
ACTIVE PARK FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed when a fault has
occurred with the active park assist system. Refer to Active park assist
in the Driving chapter for more information.
ACTIVE PARK CANCELLED (if equipped) — Displayed when the
active park assist feature has been canceled when it is in use. Refer to
Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information.
CANCELLED BY OVER SPEED (if equipped)— Displayed when the
active park assist feature self cancels due to vehicle speed over the
preset limit allowed by the active park assist system. Refer to Active
park assist in the Driving chapter for more information.
CANCELLED BY DRIVER INPUT (if equipped) — Displayed when
the autopark feature has been canceled due to driver inputs. Refer to
Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information.
Instrument Cluster
28
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CANCELLED BY ADV TRAC EVENT (if equipped) — Displayed
when the active park feature has been canceled due to the
AdvanceTrac威 system activating. Refer to Active park assist in the
Driving chapter for more information.
CANCELLED BY ABS EVENT (if equipped) — Displayed when the
active park feature has been canceled due to the ABS activating. Refer to
Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information.
ACTIVE PARK REDUCE SPEED (if equipped) — May display when
using the active park assist system. See Active park assist in the
Driving chapter for more information.
ACTIVE PARK SEARCHING (if equipped) — May display when
using the active park assist system. See Active park assist in the
Driving chapter for more information.
SPACE FOUND PULL FORWARD (if equipped) — May display when
using the active park assist system. See Active park assist in the
Driving chapter for more information.
SPACE FOUND STOP (if equipped) — May display when using the
active park assist system. See Active park assist in the Driving chapter
for more information.
PULL FORWARD USE CAUTION (if equipped) — May display when
using the active park assist system. See Active park assist in the
Driving chapter for more information.
BACK UP SLOWLY USE CAUTION (if equipped) — May display
when using the active park assist system. See Active park assist in the
Driving chapter for more information.
ACTIVE PARK FINISHED (if equipped) — May display when using
the active park assist system. See Active park assist in the Driving
chapter for more information.
REMOVE HANDS PUT IN REVERSE (if equipped) — May display
when using the active park assist system. See Active park assist in the
Driving chapter for more information.
ACTIVE PARK NOT AVAILABLE (if equipped) — May display when
using the active park assist system. See Active park assist in the
Driving chapter for more information.
ACTIVE PARK DEACTIVATED (if equipped) — Displayed when the
active park feature has been turned off. Refer to Active park assist in
the Driving chapter for more information.
Instrument Cluster
29
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TO STOP ALARM START VEHICLE — Displayed when the perimeter
alarm system is armed and the vehicle is entered using the key on the
driver’s side door. In order to prevent the perimeter alarm system from
triggering, the ignition must be turned to start before the 12 second
chime expires. See Perimeter alarm system in the Locks and Security
chapter.
SERVICE ADVANCETRAC — Displayed when the AdvanceTrac威
system has detected a condition that requires service.
Instrument Cluster
30
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AUDIO SYSTEMS
Note: If your volume is muted and MYKEY VOLUME LIMITED is
displayed, refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for more
information.
Premium/Premium plus AM/FM in-dash CD6/MP3 satellite
compatible sound system
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay. With
this feature, the radio and certain electrical features may be used for up
to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front door is
opened.
THX: Your vehicle may be equipped
with the THX威 II certified premium
audio system. This system creates
optimal acoustic quality for all
seating positions and road
conditions. The system offers an
advanced speaker system,
amplifiers, subwoofer and
equalization.
Entertainment Systems
31
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Setting the clock
CLOCK: Press to set the clock. The display will read SET TIME. Use the
memory preset numbers (0–9) to enter in the desired time– hours and
minutes. The clock will then begin from that time.
AM/FM Radio
/ VOL (Power/Volume): Press to turn the radio on/off. Turn the
knob to increase/decrease volume.
If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off,
the volume will come back on at a nominal listening level when the
ignition is turned back on.
AM/FM: Press repeatedly to select AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
TUNE: Turn the knob to go up/down the frequency band in individual
increments.
DIRECT: Press DIRECT and then select the desired radio frequency
(i.e. 93.9) using the memory preset numbers (0–9).
SEEK: Press
SEEK to access the previous/next strong radio
station.
SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of all strong radio stations.
MEMORY PRESETS (0–9): When tuned to any station, press and hold
a preset button until sound returns and PRESET # SAVED appears in
the display. You can save up to 30 stations, 10 in AM, 10 in FM1 and
FM2.
Saving presets automatically: Autoset allows you to set the strongest
local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset
stations for AM/FM1/FM2.
To activate the autoset feature: Press MENU repeatedly until AUTO
PRESET ON/OFF appears in the display. Use
SEEK to toggle
AUTO PRESET to ON, and either wait five seconds for the search to
initiate or press OK to immediately initiate the search. If you press
another control within those five seconds, the search will not initiate.
The 10 strongest stations will be filled and the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing.
If there are fewer then 10 strong stations, the system will store the last
one in the remaining presets.
RDS Radio
Available only in FM mode. This feature allows you to search
RDS-equipped stations for a certain category of music format: CLASSIC,
COUNTRY, JAZZ/RB, ROCK, etc.
Entertainment Systems
32
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To activate: Press MENU repeatedly until RDS (ON/OFF) appears in the
display. Use
SEEK to toggle RDS ON/OFF. When RDS is OFF,
you will not be able to search for RDS equipped stations or view the
station name or type.
CAT/FLD (Category/Folder): This feature allows you to select from
various music categories.
To change RDS categories: Press MENU repeatedly until RDS ON/OFF
appears in the display. Use
SEEK to toggle RDS to ON. Press
CAT. PRESS UP OR DOWN TO CHANGE RDS CATEGORY will appear in
the display. Press
SEEK to scroll through all possible categories.
When the desired category appears in the display, press
SEEK to
find the next station playing that selection or press SCAN for a brief
sampling of all stations playing that category of music.
Six Disc CD/MP3 Player
CD: Press to enter CD/MP3 mode. If a disc is already loaded into the
system, CD/MP3 play will begin where it ended last. If no CD is loaded,
NO DISC will appear in the display.
LOAD: Use to load CDs into the CD player.
To load a single CD–
Press LOAD. When the display reads SELECT CD SLOT, choose the
desired slot number using memory presets 1–6. The display will read
MOVING TO CD # and then LOAD CD #. Load the desired disc, label
side up into the CD slot opening. If you do not choose a slot within five
seconds, the system will choose for you. Once loaded, the first track will
begin to play.
To auto load up to six discs–
Press and hold LOAD until the display reads MOVING TO #. Load the
desired disc, label side up. The system will prompt you to load discs for
the remaining available slots. Insert the discs, one at a time, label side
up, when prompted. Once loaded, the disc in slot 1 will begin to play.
To choose one of the loaded CDs to play, press the number preset
buttons (1–6) to choose the desired disc.
OK
/ (Play/Pause): Press to play/pause a track when playing a
CD.
(EJECT): Press and select the desired CD slot by pressing the
corresponding memory preset #. The display will read EJECTING #.
Entertainment Systems
33
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When the system has ejected the CD, the display will read REMOVE CD
#. If you do not remove the CD the system will reload the disc.
To auto eject all loaded discs– Press and hold
. The system will eject
all discs and prompt you when to remove them.
SEEK: Press
SEEK to access the previous/next track.
CAT (Category) / FLD (Folder):
In MP3 mode only– Press CAT/FOLD and then press
SEEK to
access the previous/next folder.
SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current disc or
MP3 folder.
DIRECT:
In CD mode– Press DIRECT. The display will read DIRECT TRACK
MODE SELECT TRACK. Enter the desired track number using the
memory preset buttons (0–9). The system will then begin playing that
track.
In MP3 folder mode– Press DIRECT and the memory preset buttons
(0–9) of the desired folder. The system will advance to that specific
folder.
TEXT:
In MP3 mode only– Press TEXT repeatedly to view Album (AL), Folder
(FL), Song (SO) and Artist (AR) in the display, if available.
In TEXT mode: Sometimes the display requires additional text to be
displayed. When the</>indicatorisactive,pressTEXT and then
press
SEEK to view the additional display text.
COMPRESSION: Press MENU repeatedly until COMPRESSION ON/OFF
appears in the display. Use
SEEK to toggle ON/OFF. When
COMPRESSION is ON, the system will bring the soft and loud CD
passages together for a more consistent listening level.
SHUFFLE: Press SHUFFLE to toggle on/off and begin/stop random play.
The system will only shuffle the disc currently playing.
Satellite Radio
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
SIRIUS: Press repeatedly to access satellite radio mode, if equipped.
Press repeatedly to cycle through SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 modes.
Entertainment Systems
34
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TUNE: Turn to go to the next / previous available SIRIUS satellite
station.
DIRECT: Press DIRECT then enter the desired channel (i.e. 002) using
the memory preset buttons (0–9). If you only enter one digit, press OK
and the system will go to that satellite channel. If you enter three digits,
the system will automatically go to that channel, if available. You may
cancel your entry by pressing DIRECT.
If an invalid station number is entered, INVALID CHANNEL will appear
in the display and the system will continue playing the current station.
SEEK: Press
SEEK to seek to the previous/next channel. If a
specific category is selected, (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.),
press
SEEK to seek to the previous/next channel in the selected
category. Press and hold
SEEK to fast seek through the
previous/next channels.
SCAN: Press SCAN for a brief sampling of all available SIRIUS satellite
channels. If a specific category is selected, (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.) press
SCAN for a brief sampling of all available SIRIUS satellite channels within
the selected category.
MEMORY PRESETS (0–9): There are 30 available presets, 10 each for
SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your memory
presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a memory
preset number (0–9) until sound returns.
TEXT: Press and release to display the artist and song title. While in
TEXT MODE, press again to scroll through the Artist (AR), Song (SO),
Channel (CH) and Category (CA).
In TEXT MODE: Sometimes the display requires additional text to be
displayed. When the</>indicatorisactive,pressTEXT and then
press
SEEK to view the additional display text.
CAT (Category) / FLD (Folder): Press to toggle between turning the
most recently selected satellite radio category on or off. The category
icon (CAT) will illuminate in the display when a specific category is
selected (the icon will not illuminate during CATEGORY ALL). If no
category has ever been selected, NO CATEGORY SELECTED will display.
Note: Separate categories can be set for SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3.
Refer to Satellite radio menu for further information on selecting a
satellite radio category.
Entertainment Systems
35
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SATELLITE RADIO MENU: Press MENU when satellite radio mode is
active to access. Press OK to enter into the satellite radio menu.
Press
SEEK to cycle through the following options:
• CATEGORY MENU- Press OK to enter category mode.
Press
SEEK to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS
channel Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.) Press OK when the
desired category appears in the display. After a category is selected,
press
SEEK to search for that specific category of channels
only (i.e. ROCK). You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all
available SIRIUS categories and channels. Press OK to close and
return to the main menu.
• SONG SEEK MENU- Press OK to enter song seek menu.
Press
SEEK to scroll through the following options:
a. SAVE THIS SONG: Press OK to save the currently playing song’s
title in the system’s memory. (If you try to save something other than
a song, CANT SAVE will appear in the display.) When the chosen song
is playing on any satellite radio channel, the system will alert you with
an audible prompt. Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and
the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song. You
can save up to 20 song titles. If you attempt to save more than 20
titles, the display will read REPLACE SONG? Press OK to access the
saved titles and press
SEEK to cycle through the saved titles.
When the song title appears in the display that you would like to
replace, press OK. SONG REPLACED will appear in the display.
b. DELETE A SONG: Press OK to delete a song from the system’s
memory. Press
SEEK to cycle through the saved songs. When
the song appears in the display that you would like to delete, press
OK. The song will appear in the display for confirmation. Press OK
again and the display will read SONG DELETED. If you do not want
to delete the currently listed song, press
SEEK to select either
RETURN or CANCEL.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
c. DELETE ALL SONGS: Press OK to delete all song’s from the
system’s memory. The display will read ARE YOU SURE ? Press OK to
confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL
DELETED.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
Entertainment Systems
36
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
d. DISABLE ALERTS/ENABLE ALERTS: Press OK to
enable/disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your
selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel. (The system
default is disabled.) SONG ALERTS ENABLED/DISABLED will appear
in the display. The menu listing will display the opposite state. For
example, if you have chosen to enable the song alerts, the menu
listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on, so your other
optionistoturnthemoff.
• CHANNEL LOCKOUT MENU- Press OK to enter the Channel
Lockout menu. Press the
SEEK to scroll through the following
options:
a. LOCK/UNLOCK THIS CHANNEL: Press OK when
LOCK/UNLOCK THIS CHANNEL is displayed and the display will read
ENTER PIN. Enter your four-digit PIN number (initial PIN is 1234)
and the system will lock/unlock the channel and CHANNEL LOCKED
or UNLOCKED will be displayed.
Note: you must be tuned to the specific channel you want to
lock/unlock when using this feature.
b. CHANGE PIN: Press OK when CHANGE PIN is displayed. The
display will read ENTER OLD PIN. Enter your current (old) PIN
number and when the system accepts your entry it will display
ENTER NEW PIN. Enter your new four-digit PIN and the system will
save the new PIN and PIN SAVED will display.
c. UNLOCK ALL CHANNELS: Press OK when UNLOCK ALL
CHANNELS is displayed and the display will read ENTER PIN. Enter
your four-digit PIN and the system will unlock all channels and the
display will read CHANNEL UNLOCKED.
d. RESET PIN: Press OK when RESET PIN is displayed. The display
will read ARE YOUR SURE. Press OK again to automatically reset the
PIN number to its initial password setting (1234). PIN RESET TO
DEFAULT PIN will be displayed.
e. RETURN: Press OK when RETURN is displayed and the system
will exit back to the satellite radio menu.
Sound Adjustments
Press SOUND repeatedly to cycle through the following features:
BASS: Press
SEEK to adjust the level of bass.
TREBLE: Press
SEEK to adjust the level of treble.
BALANCE: Press
SEEK to adjust the audio between the left
(L) and right (R) speakers.
Entertainment Systems
37
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FADE: Press SEEK to adjust the audio between the back (B)
and front (F) speakers.
SPEED COMPENSATED VOLUME: With this feature on, radio volume
automatically gets louder with increasing vehicle speed to compensate
for road and wind noise.
The default setting is off.
Use
SEEK to adjust between SPEED OFF and levels 1–7:
Increasing the level from 1 (lowest setting) to 7 (highest setting) allows
the radio volume to automatically change slightly with vehicle speed to
compensate for road and wind noise.
Recommended level is 1–3; SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7
is the maximum setting.
Occupancy mode (if equipped): Press SOUND repeatedly to reach the
Occupancy mode setting. Press
SEEK to select DSP STEREO
MODE or THX SURROUND.
Extra Features
AUX: Press repeatedly to access SYNC威 or LINE IN (auxiliary audio
mode).
For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode, refer to
Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter. For more information on
SYNC威, refer to the SYNC威 supplement.
OK
/ (Play/Pause): Your vehicle is equipped with special phone
and media features which will require you to confirm commands by
pressing OK. Refer to the SYNC威 information included with your vehicle
for further information.
(Phone): Press to access SYNC PHONE features. Please refer to the
SYNC威 information included with your vehicle for further information.
Audio system–Navigation system based (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the navigation system, it will have an
integrated navigation/audio system. See the Navigation system
supplement for operating instructions on using this audio system.
Entertainment Systems
38
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Auxiliary input jack (Line in)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
The Auxiliary Input Jack provides a
way to connect your portable music
player to the in-vehicle audio
system. This allows the audio from a
portable music player to be played
through the vehicle speakers with
high fidelity. To achieve optimal
performance, please observe the
following instructions when
attaching your portable music
device to the audio system.
If your vehicle is equipped with a
navigation system, refer to
Auxiliary input jack section in the
Audio features chapter of your
Navigation system supplement.
Required equipment:
1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones
2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm)
connectors at each end
To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.
2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully
charged and that the device is turned off.
LINE IN
Entertainment Systems
39
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output
of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ
in your vehicle.
4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into
the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.
5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the
volume.
6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE, LINE IN or
SYNC LINE IN appears in the display.
You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may
be low.
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the
AUX and FM or CD controls.
Troubleshooting:
1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level
outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not
compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with devices
that have a headphone output with a volume control.
2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio
system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality. Many
portable music players have different output levels, so not all players
should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound best at full
volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.
3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the
portable music player volume down. If the problems persists, replace or
recharge the batteries in the portable music player.
4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner
when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control
(play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.
5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your
portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is
moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure
location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the vehicle is
in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the
portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.
Entertainment Systems
40
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
USB port
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Your vehicle is equipped with a USB
port inside your center console. This
feature allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks, and
also to charge devices if they
support this feature. For further
information on this feature, refer to
Accessing and using your USB
port in the SYNC威 supplement or
Navigation system supplement.
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio frequencies:
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
LINE IN
Entertainment Systems
41
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Radio reception factors:
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
CD/CD player care
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only.
(Never touch the playing
surface).
• Inspect discs before playing.
• Clean only with an approved CD
cleaner.
• Wipe discs from the center out.
Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Clean using a circular motion.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Entertainment Systems
42
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Do not use any irregular shaped
CDs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.
CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be
inserted into the CD player as
the label may peel and cause the
CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with
permanent felt tip marker rather
than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Audio system warranty and service
Refer to the Warranty Guide/Customer Information Guide for audio
system warranty information. If service is necessary, see your dealer or
qualified technician.
MP3 track and folder structure
Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure
as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track mode
(system default) and MP3 folder mode. For more information on track
and folder mode, refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following
section.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The
player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255.
Note: The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less
depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio
present.
• MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted
by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from
F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation
through the disc files.
Entertainment Systems
43
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Sample MP3 structure
If you are burning your own MP3
discs, it is important to understand
how the system will read the
structures you create. While various
files may be present, (files with
extensions other than mp3), only
files with the .mp3 extension will be
played. Other files will be ignored
by the system. This enables you to
use the same MP3 disc for a variety
of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in vehicle
system.
In track mode, the system will display and play the structure as if it were
only one level deep (all .mp3 files will be played, regardless of being in a
specific folder). In folder mode, the system will only play the .mp3 files
in the current folder.
Satellite radio information
Satellite radio channels: SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music, news,
sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels,
visit www.sirius.com in the United States, www.sirius-canada.ca in
Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1–888–539–7474.
Satellite radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio
system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite
radio reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
11
2
.mp3
2
.mp3
3
.mp3
3
4
.mp3
64
.mp3
7
.mp3
.doc
.ppt
.xls
5
.mp3
Entertainment Systems
44
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an
audio mute.
Unlike AM/FM audible static, you will hear an audio mute when there is
a satellite radio signal interference. Your radio display may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate the interference.
SIRIUS satellite radio service: SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription
based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and
entertainment programming. A service fee is required in order to receive
SIRIUS service. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed
SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include:
• Hardware and limited subscription term, which begins on the date of
sale or lease of the vehicle.
• Use of online media player providing access to all SIRIUS music
channels over the internet using any computer connected to the
internet (U.S. customers only)
For information on extended subscription terms, contact SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474.
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN): This 12–digit
Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate, modify or track your
satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating
with SIRIUS. While in Satellite Radio mode, you can view this number on
the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control simultaneously.
Entertainment Systems
45
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Radio Display Condition Action Required
ACQUIRING Radio requires more
than two seconds to
produce audio for
the selected
channel.
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
SAT FAULT Internal module or
system failure
present.
If this message does not
clear within a short period
of time, or with an ignition
key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See your
authorized dealer for
service.
INVALID CHNL Channel no longer
available.
This previously available
channel is no longer
available. Tune to another
channel. If the channel was
one of your presets, you
may choose another
channel for that preset
button.
UNSUBSCRIBED Subscription not
available for this
channel.
Contact SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474 to
subscribe to the channel or
tune to another channel.
NO TEXT Artist information
not available.
Artist information not
available at this time on
this channel. The system is
working properly.
NO TEXT Song title
information not
available.
Song title information not
available at this time on
this channel. The system is
working properly.
Entertainment Systems
46
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Radio Display Condition Action Required
NO TEXT Category
information not
available.
Category information not
available at this time on
this channel. The system is
working properly.
NO SIGNAL Loss of signal from
the SIRIUS satellite
or SIRIUS tower to
the vehicle antenna.
You are in a location that is
blocking the SIRIUS signal
(i.e., tunnel, under an
overpass, dense foliage,
etc). The system is working
properly. When you move
into an open area, the
signal should return.
UPDATING Update of channel
programming in
progress.
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
CALL SIRIUS
1–888–539–7474
Satellite service has
been deactivated by
SIRIUS Satellite
Radio.
Call SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474 to
re-activate or resolve
subscription issues.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a navigation system. Refer to the
Navigation System supplement for further information.
SYNC姞
Your vehicle is equipped with SYNC威, a hands-free communications and
entertainment system with special phone and media features. For more
information, please refer to the SYNC威 supplement or to the SYNC威
section in the Navigation System supplement (if equipped).
Entertainment Systems
47
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL WITH
HEATED AND COOLED SEATS
Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,
refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
1.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents
and de-mister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and thin
ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window
fogging. Press this button again to return to the previous air flow
selection.
To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
2.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, de-mister
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. The system will automatically
provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
3.
: Distributes air through the floor vents, rear seat floor vents.
To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
4.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,
rear seat floor vents and de-mister vents.
Climate Controls
48
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
5.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
6.
Passenger heated seat: Press to control the passenger heated
seat. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter for more information.
7. PASS TEMP: Press to activate separate passenger temperature
control and turn the dial to increase/decrease the airflow temperature on
the passenger side of the vehicle.
8.
Passenger cooled seat: Press to control the passenger cooled
seat. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter for more information.
9.
Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation in
the vehicle. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle.
Recirculated air engages automatically when MAX A/C is selected or
can be engaged manually in any airflow mode except
(defrost).
When the ignition switch is turned off and back on, the climate system
will return to the recirculated air mode only if the A/C button LED is
illuminated and the air distribution selection is either
(panel)
or
(panel/floor).
Recirculation may turn off automatically in all airflow modes, except
MAX A/C.
10. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. A/C
engages automatically in MAX A/C,
(defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
11. AUTO / + – (Fan Speed Control): Press to engage automatic
temperature control. Select the desired temperature using the
temperature control. The system will automatically determine fan speed,
airflow location, A/C on or off, and outside or recirculated air, to heat or
cool the vehicle to reach the desired temperature.
For manual fan speed control, turn the knob to adjust fan speed.
To return to full automatic control, Press AUTO.
Climate Controls
49
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
12. MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more
economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also help reduce
undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. Press the MAX A/C button
again for normal A/C operation.
13.
R
Rear defroster/Heated mirrors: Press to activate/deactivate
the rear window defroster and heated outside mirrors. Refer to Rear
window defroster later in this chapter and Heated outside mirrors in
the Driver Controls chapter for more information.
14.
Driver cooled seat: Press to control the driver cooled seat.
Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter for more information.
15.
Power/Cabin temperature: Press to activate/deactivate the
climate control system. When the system is off, outside air is prevented
from entering the vehicle.
Turn the dial to increase/decrease the airflow temperature on the
driver side of the vehicle. This control also adjusts the passenger side
temperature when PASS TEMP is off.
16.
Driver heated seat: Press to control the driver heated seat.
Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter for more information.
Climate Controls
50
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL WITH
HEATED AND COOLED SEATS
(NAVIGATION SYSTEM BASED–IF EQUIPPED)
Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,
refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
1. Climate: Press to control the climate control system through the
touch display screen. See Touchscreen functions later in this section.
2. Passenger temperature: Press to activate separate passenger
temperature control and turn the knob to increase/decrease the air
temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle.
3.
Passenger heated seat: Press to heat the passenger heated seat.
Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter for more information.
4. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. A/C
engages automatically in MAX A/C,
(defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
A/C
Climate Controls
51
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5.
R
Rear defroster: Press to activate/deactivate the rear window
defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more
information. This button will also activate the heated mirrors.
6.
Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
vents and de-mister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog
and thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce
window fogging. Press this button again to return to the previous air flow
selection.
7.
Power: Press to activate/deactivate the climate control system.
When the system is off, outside air is prevented from entering the
vehicle. The climate status in the touchscreen will also be turned off.
8.
Driver heated seat: Press to heat the driver heated seat. Refer to
Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter
for more information.
9. Driver temperature: Press to increase/decrease the air temperature
on the driver side of the vehicle. This control also adjusts the passenger
side temperature when dual zone operation is disengaged.
10.
Driver cooled seat: Press to cool the driver cooled seat. Refer
to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter for more information.
11. AUTO: Press to engage full automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system will
automatically determine fan speed, airflow location, A/C on or off, and
outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the
desired temperature.
12. –
+ Fan speed control: Press (- / +) to decrease/increase the
fan speed.
13.
Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation
in the vehicle. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to
cool down the interior of the vehicle when used with A/C and may also
help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle.
Recirculated air engages automatically when MAX A/C is selected or can
be engaged manually in any airflow mode except
(defrost).
Recirculation may turn off automatically in all airflow selections
except MAX A/C.
14.
Passenger cooled seat: Press to cool the passenger cooled
seat. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter for more information.
Climate Controls
52
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TOUCHSCREEN FUNCTIONS
Temperature– Press the
up and down arrows on the left side of
the screen to increase/decrease the airflow temperature for the driver
side of the vehicle. This control also adjusts the passenger side
temperature when dual zone operation is disengaged.
Press the
up and down arrows on the right side of the screen to
increase/decrease the airflow temperature for the passenger side of the
vehicle.
•
- Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
•
- Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,
rear seat floor vents and de-mister vents.
•
- Distributes air through the floor vents, rear seat floor vents.
•
- Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, de-mister
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. The system will
automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
To return to full automatic control, press AUTO on the main climate
control bezel.
Fan Speed– Press + to increase the fan speed and – to decrease fan
speed.
Dual– Press to activate/deactivate separate driver and passenger
temperature controls.
Max A/C– Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more
economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also help reduce
undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. Press MAX A/C again for
normal operation.
Climate Controls
53
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
VOICE COMMANDS IN CLIMATE MODE
Please refer to the Voice commands in climate mode section of the
Navigation system supplement for more information on using voice
commands with the climate control system.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the
position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
system off or with recirculated air engaged.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• For maximum cooling performance (MAX A/C):
During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for
extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C in
MAX A/C, reduce blower fan speed from the highest setting and put the
vehicle’s transmission into the PARK gear position (automatic
transmission only) to continue to receive cool air from your A/C system.
In AUTO mode, press AUTO control and set to desired temperature.
In manual override mode, select
or , A/C and recirculated
air
and set the temperature to 60°F (16°C). Set the fan to the
highest speed initially, then adjust to maintain passenger comfort.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2–3 minutes after starting the vehicle or until the vehicle has
“aired out.”
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan to the highest speed.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents toward the side windows.
Climate Controls
54
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
R
The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and
works to clear the rear window of fog and thin ice.
The ignition must be on to operate the rear window defroster.
The rear defroster turns off automatically after 10 minutes or when the
ignition is turned off. To manually turn off the defroster before
10 minutes have passed, press the control again.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
CABIN AIR FILTER
The cabin air filter element is designed to reduce the concentration of
airborne particles such as dust, spores and pollen in the air being
supplied to the interior of the vehicle. The presence of a particulate filter
element provides the following benefits:
• Improves your driving comfort by reducing particle concentration.
• Improves the interior compartment cleanliness.
• Protects the climate control components from particle deposits.
Note: A cabin air filter must be installed at all times to prevent foreign
objects from entering the system. Running the system without a filter in
place could result in degradation or damage to the system.
The access door for the filter is located behind the glove box. For
replacement intervals regarding the cabin air filter, see the scheduled
maintenance information. For more information regarding your filter,
see your authorized dealer.
Climate Controls
55
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Turns the lamps off.
Turns on the parking lamps,
instrument panel lamps, license
plate lamps and tail lamps.
Turns the low beam headlamps
on.
Adaptive headlamps (if equipped)
The headlamp beams move in the same direction as the steering wheel
to provide more visibility when driving around curves.
Note: The system has a power-up movement check feature. When the
vehicle is started, the lamps track to the right, then back to center to
alert the driver that the system is working properly. There is a delay of
two to five seconds before the adaptive headlamp system will operate
when the vehicle is driven, as the system is inactive below 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Autolamp control
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights. When selected,
the automatic high beam system is
active, if equipped and if enabled.
See Auto high beams later in this
chapter.
• To turn autolamps on, rotate the
control counterclockwise to
.
• To turn autolamps off, rotate the
control clockwise to off.
Lights
56
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The autolamp system also keeps the lights on for a predetermined
amount of time after the ignition is turned off. You can change the
amount of time the lamps stay on by using the programming procedure
that follows:
Note: With autolamps, your vehicle has a headlamps on with windshield
wipers feature. If the windshield wipers are turned on (for a brief period
of time), the exterior lamps will turn on with the headlamp control in the
autolamp position.
Autolamps - Programmable exit delay
Programmable exit delay allows the length of the autolamp exit delay to
be changed.
To program the auto lamp exit time delay:
1. Start with the ignition off and the headlamp control in the autolamp
position.
2. Turn the headlamp switch to off.
3. Turn the ignition on and then off.
4. Turn the headlamp switch to the autolamp position. The headlamps
will turn on.
5. Wait the desired amount of time for the exit delay you want (up to
three minutes), then turn the headlamps off.
Fog lamp control
With the ignition on, the fog lamps
can be turned on when the
headlamp control is pulled toward
you and is in any of the following
positions:
• Parking lamps
• Low beams
• Autolamps (when active)
The fog lamp indicator light will
illuminate when the fog lamps have been turned on. The fog lamps will
not operate when the high beams are active.
Lights
57
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
Auto high beams
During nighttime driving, the automatic high beam system automatically
turns on your high beams if it is dark enough and no other traffic is
present. When it detects an approaching vehicle’s headlights or a
preceding vehicle’s tail lamps, the system turns off the high beams (low
beams remain on) before they distract other drivers.
If the vehicle is equipped with automatic high beams, the high beam
switch will operate differently depending on the status of the automatic
high beam system. Each of the possible operating scenarios are detailed
below:
Scenario 1:
Conditions - The automatic high beam system is set to ON in the
message center. The headlamp switch is in
(auto lamps). The
automatic high beam system has turned the high beams on.
Operation - The high beam switch will not perform any function.
Scenario 2:
Conditions - The automatic high beam system is set to ON in the
message center. The headlamp switch is in
(auto lamps). The
automatic high beam system has not turned the high beams on.
Operation - The high beam switch can be used to turn the high beams
on. They will then remain on until the switch has been returned to the
neutral position and the auto high beam system has turned the high
beams off.
Scenario 3:
Conditions - The automatic high beam system is set to ON in the
message center. The headlamp switch is in
(off), (park lamps),
or (on).
O
F
F
Lights
58
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Operation - The high beam switch can be used to turn the high beams
on and off.
Scenario 4:
Conditions - The automatic high beam system is set to OFF in the
message center. The headlamp switch is in
(auto
lamps), (off), (park lamps), or (on).
Operation - The high beam switch can be used to turn the high beams
on and off.
Enabling/disabling auto high beams
Enabling/disabling and/or checking the status of the automatic high beam
system can be performed using the message center. See Message center
in the Instrument cluster chapter.
Activating high beams
If there is no traffic in front of the vehicle, the high beams will come on
automatically and the
light will display in the instrument panel if
the following are true:
• The headlamp control is in auto lamp
mode.
• Fog lamps are turned off.
• The ambient light level is low enough that high beams are needed.
• Vehicle speed must be greater than 32 mph (51 km/h).
• Severe weather is not detected.
Deactivating high beams
The automatic high beams will deactivate if any of the following events
occur:
• An approaching vehicle’s headlights or a preceding vehicle’s tail lamps
are detected.
• The headlamp control is moved out of the autolamps position.
• The vehicle speed falls below 27 mph (43 km/h).
• The ambient light level is high enough that high beams are not
needed.
• Severe rain, snow or fog is detected.
• The camera is blocked.
Lights
59
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Activating the multi-function lever will put the headlamps in
manual high beam mode (constant or flash-to-pass) until the lever is
returned to the neutral position. To manually override the auto high
beam and go to low beam, the headlamp control must be taken out of
the
(autolamp) position. For severe fog on freeways, or severe fog
in low traffic situations, use of fog lamps is recommended.
Setting auto high beam sensitivity
The automatic high beam system has two sensitivity settings. The default
setting is near. If you would like the high beams to turn off when traffic
is further away, the sensitivity setting can be changed to far. The
procedure is as follows:
Preconditions:
• Vehicle is at a stop.
• Ignition is in the on position.
• The headlamp control is in the
position.
• High-beams are off.
Programming Sequence:
1. Turn the headlamp control from
(on) to (autolamp) three
times within two seconds, ending in
(on).
2. Cycle flash-to-pass three times using the multi-function lever.
3. The high beams will flash momentarily to confirm that the sensitivity
setting has been changed.
Note: The programming sequence will end if either of the following
occur:
• The vehicle speed is not zero.
• The battery voltage is out of normal range.
Troubleshooting
If the automatic high beam camera becomes blocked, the high beams will
not come on automatically. They will only activate when they are
manually turned on with the multi-function lever.
Typical road dust, dirt and water spots will not affect the automatic high
beam system’s performance.
For significant blockages (e.g. bird dropping, bug splatter, snow, or ice),
the automatic high beam system uses a blocked sensor computer
program. If it detects a blockage, it will be monitored for two minutes. If
no changes are observed, the system will go into low beam mode until
the blockage is cleared.
Lights
60
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If it appears that automatic control of the high beams is not functioning,
check the windshield in front of the camera for blockage.
Flash to pass
Pull toward you to activate and
release to deactivate.
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
To activate:
• the ignition must be in the on position,
• the headlamp control must be in the off, autolamps or parking lamp
position and
• the transmission must be out of the P (Park) position.
WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at
dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp
(DRL) system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not
provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate
your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable
lit components in the vehicle during
headlamp and parking lamp
operation.
• Tapthetoporbottomofthe
control to brighten/dim all interior
lit components incrementally, or
• Press and hold the top or bottom of the control until the desired
lighting level is reached.
• Press and hold the top of the control to the full on position to activate
the “dome on” feature. This will turn on the interior courtesy lights.
The lights will remain on until the bottom of the control is pressed.
Lights
61
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is
installed, the dimmer control requires re-calibration. Press the dimmer
control from the full dim position to the full on position to reset. This
will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting conditions.
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident, the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by your authorized dealer.
Vertical aim adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height of the
headlamp bulb center from the
ground and mark an 8 foot
(2.4 meter) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this
height (a piece of masking tape works well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood.
To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting, you may want to block the
light from one headlamp while adjusting the other.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe an area of high intensity
light. The top of the high intensity
area should touch the horizontal
reference line, if not, the beam will
need to be adjusted using the next
step.
Lights
62
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise (to adjust down) or
counterclockwise (to adjust up).
The horizontal edge of the brighter
light should touch the horizontal
reference line.
6. Close the hood and turn off the
lamps.
HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS
NON-ADJUSTABLE.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Second row map lamps
The second row lamps are located
at the rear of the headliner above
each outboard seat.
The second row lamps light when:
• any door is opened,
• the top of the instrument panel
dimmer switch is pressed until
the courtesy lamps come on, and
• any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off.
Press the lamp lens to activate the reading lamps.
Lights
63
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Ambient lighting
Illuminates footwells, storage bins
and cupholders with a choice of
several colors. The ambient lighting
control is located on the instrument
panel, left of the steering wheel. To
activate, press and release the top
of the control to cycle through the
color choices plus the off state.
Press and release the bottom of the
control to change intensity.
The lights come on whenever the ignition is in either the on or accessory
position.
Note: The ambient color will stay on until the ignition is placed in the
off position and either of the front doors are opened or the accessory
delay timer expires. At that time, the ambient color changes to the
signature color.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Lamp assembly condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the
lens. The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during
normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry
weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets)
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens
Examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp water
leak) are:
• Water puddle inside the lamp
• Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of
the lens
Take your vehicle to dealer for service if any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
Lights
64
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Function Number of bulbs
Trade
number
Headlamp high beam/
low beam
2 D3S
Front park/turn/
sidemarker lamp
2 3457
Backup lamp 2 921
* Sidemarker lamp (rear) 2 LED
* Tail lamp 2 LED
Turn signal 4 HPC 16WY
License plate lamp 2 168
* High-mount brake lamp 1 LED
Fog lamp (if equipped) 2 H11
Map lamp 2 12V6W
Dome/reading lamps 3 578
To replace all instrument panel lights, see your authorized dealer.
* To replace these lamps, see your authorized dealer.
Replacing interior bulbs
Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.
Replacing HID headlamp bulbs
The headlamps on your vehicle use a “high intensity discharge” source.
These lamps operate at a high voltage. When the bulb is burned out, the
bulb assembly must be replaced by your authorized dealer.
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal/sidemarker bulbs
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in the off position, then open the hood.
Lights
65
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Reach in behind the headlamp assembly to access the bulb sockets
and connectors.
3. Locate the parking/turn signal
lamp electrical connector and
remove it by pulling it straight off.
4. Remove the bulb socket by
turning it counterclockwise and
pulling it straight out.
5. To remove the bulb, pull it
straight out of the bulb socket.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing rear brake/tail/turn and sidemarker lamp bulbs
The brake/tail/turn/side marker lamp and backup bulbs are located in the
tail lamp assembly. Follow the same steps to replace the bulbs.
Note: Your vehicle is equipped with a tail lamp assembly containing
integral multiple light emitting diodes (LED) for the stop/tail and
sidemarker functions. If replacement is required, see your authorized
dealer.
• (1) Turn signal bulbs
• (2) Backup lamp
• (3) Stop/tail and sidemarker
bulbs (LED)
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the off position and open the
trunk.
2. Remove the cargo net fastener (if
equipped) and carefully pull the
carpet away to expose the backside
of the tail lamp assembly.
3. Remove the nut and washer assemblies, then pull the lamp assembly
away from the vehicle.
4. Remove the bulb socket by rotating it counterclockwise, then pulling it
out of the lamp assembly.
5. Pull the bulb straight from the socket.
Lights
66
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: The turn bulb is a socket/bulb assembly and the bulb cannot be
removed separately.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing high-mount brake lamp bulbs
Your vehicle is equipped with an LED center high-mount stop lamp. It is
designed to last the life of the vehicle. If replacement is required, it is
recommended that you see your authorized dealer.
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the off position.
2. Remove the two screws from the
license plate lamp assembly.
3. Remove bulb socket by turning
counterclockwise.
4. Carefully pull the bulb out from
the socket.
Install new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing fog lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the fog lamp switch is in the off position.
2. Rotate the harness/bulb assembly
counterclockwise, to remove from
the fog lamp.
3. Carefully disconnect the bulb
from the harness assembly via the
two snap clips.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Lights
67
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate toward you to decrease the
speed of the wipers.
Rain sensing wipers (if
equipped): The rain sensing wipers
will automatically activate when
moisture is present on the
windshield and the multi-function
switch is set to one of five
auto/interval moisture sensitivity settings. Rotate the end of the control
toward the windshield to increase the sensitivity. The speed of the rain
sensitive wipers will vary based on the amount of moisture detected on
the windshield and the auto/interval setting. The wipers will continue to
wipe as long as the presence of moisture is detected on the windshield.
More or less wiping may occur depending on humidity, mist or light rain,
or road spray.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean, especially the area around the
rear view mirror where the sensor is located or rain sensor performance
may be affected.
Note: During winter driving conditions with ice, snow or a salty road
mist, inconsistent wiping or smearing may occur. In these conditions, you
can lower the sensitivity to reduce the amount of smearing or override
the feature by selecting low- or high-speed wiping or turning the wiper
system off.
Note: The rain sensing wiper feature must be turned off before entering
a car wash.
Windshield washer: Push the end
of the stalk:
• briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
• a quick push and hold: the wipers
will swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• a long push and hold: the wipers
and washer fluid will be activated
for up to ten seconds.
Driver Controls
68
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Courtesy wipe feature: One extra wipe will occur a few seconds after
washing the front window to clear any excess washer fluid remaining on
the windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.
Windshield wiper rainlamp feature
When the windshield wipers are turned on during daylight, and the
headlamp control is in the autolamp position, the exterior lamps will turn
on after a brief delay and will remain on until the wipers are turned off.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPE STEERING COLUMN
The steering column can be
adjusted manually by moving the
four-way rocker adjustment control
located below the turn signal/wiper
control stalk. Hold the control to
adjust.
The telescope function is adjusted
by moving the control toward the
driver to telescope out, and toward
the instrument panel to telescope
in.
The tilt function is adjusted by moving the control up or down.
During easy exit, when you remove the key, the column will move to the
full in and up position. When the key is inserted into the ignition, the
column will return to the previous setting.
WARNING: Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is
moving.
Driver Controls
69
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamp.
Slide on rod feature
Rotate the visor towards the side
window and extend it rearward for
additional sunlight coverage.
Note: To stow the visor back into
the headliner, visor must be
retracted before moving it back
toward the windshield.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package.
Storage compartment
The storage compartment may be used to store a pair of sunglasses.
Press the release area on the rear edge of the bin door to open the
storage compartment. The door will open to the full open position.
Single bin compartment
Driver Controls
70
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Double bin compartment
ELECTRONIC COMPASS
The compass heading is displayed in the Center Integrated Display
(CID).
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy.
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass calibration
adjustment.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this
error. Refer to Compass zone adjustment.
Driver Controls
71
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Compass zone adjustment
1. Determine which magnetic zone
you are in for your geographic
location by referring to the zone
map.
2. Turn ignition to the on position.
3. Press and hold the 7 and 9 radio
preset buttons together for
approximately five seconds until
ZONE XX appears in the CID.
4. Press and release the 7 and 9
radio preset buttons together,
repeatedly until ZONE XX changes
to the correct zone (1–15) in the
CID.
5. The direction will display after
the buttons are released. The zone
is now updated.
Compass calibration adjustment
Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures
and high voltage lines. For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical
accessories (heater/air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all
vehicle doors are shut.
1. Start the vehicle.
123
4
5
6 7 8 9 1011
12
13
14
15
Driver Controls
72
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. To calibrate, press and hold the 7
and 9 radio preset buttons together
for approximately 10 seconds until
CAL appears. Release the buttons.
3. Slowly drive the vehicle in a
circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h])
until the CAL display changes to the
direction value (N, S, E, W, etc.). It
may take up to five circles to
complete calibration.
4. The compass is now calibrated.
CENTER CONSOLE
Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These
include:
1. Cupholders
2. Driver and passenger arm rests
that slide forward or rearward and
also opens the utility compartment
that has an audio input jack, USB
port and power point inside.
Note: Move the arm rests to the
rearward position to open the utility
compartment.
3. Rear power point, heated seat
switches and air vents to the rear seating positions.
4. Power point door and a power rear sunshade control (if equipped).
WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects
can injure you in a collision.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Driver Controls
73
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Auxiliary power point can be found in the following location:
• On the center console
• Inside the utility compartment
• On the rear of the center console accessible from the rear seat
Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element (if
equipped).
To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the power point(s)
over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC/180W. If the power point or cigar
lighter socket is not working, a fuse may have blown. Refer to Fuses and
relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on
checking and replacing fuses.
To have full capacity usage of your power point, the engine is required to
be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery. To prevent
the battery from being discharged:
• do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running,
• do not leave battery chargers, video game adapters, computers and
other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for
extended periods.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
Driver Controls
74
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Press and pull the switches to open
and close windows.
• Press down (to the first detent)
and hold the switch to open.
• Pull up (to the first detent) and
hold the switch to close.
Rear Window Buffeting: When one or both of the rear windows are
open, the vehicle may demonstrate a wind throb or buffeting noise. This
noise can be alleviated by lowering a front window approximately two to
three inches.
Express-down (One-touch down, all windows)
Allows the windows to open fully
without holding the control down.
Press the switch completely down to
the second detent and release
quickly. The window will open fully.
Momentarily press the switch to any
position to stop the window
operation.
Express-up (One-touch up, all windows)
Allows the windows to close fully
without holding the control up. Pull
the switch completely up to the
second detent and release quickly.
The window will close fully.
Momentarily press the switch to any
position to stop the window
operation.
Global open windows
You can open the vehicle’s windows, and (if equipped) vent the moon
roof (power shade opens) by using the
control on the remote
transmitter.
Press and hold the
control on the transmitter for at least two
seconds, to begin to open the windows and vent the moon roof (power
shade opens). For the transmitter, pressing either the
or control
on the transmitter will stop all motion.
A
U
T
O
A
U
T
O
Driver Controls
75
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: The ignition must be off and the accessory delay feature must not
be activated in order for this feature to operate.
Note: This feature can be disabled or enabled by your authorized dealer.
Global close windows
You can close the vehicle’s windows and moon roof (if equipped) by
using the
control on the remote transmitter.
Press and hold the
control on the transmitter for at least two seconds
to begin to close the windows and moon roof.
Note: The ignition must be off and the accessory delay feature must not
be activated in order for this feature to operate.
Note: This feature can be disabled or enabled by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: To avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, verify
that windows and moon roof are free of obstructions before
operating and ensure that children and/or pets are not in the proximity
of window openings.
Bounce-back
When an obstacle has been detected in the window opening as the
window is moving upward, the window will automatically reverse
direction and move down. This is known as “bounce-back”. If the ignition
is turned off (without accessory delay being active) during bounce-back,
the window will move down until the bounce-back position is reached.
Security override
To override a bounce-back condition, within two seconds after the
window reaches the bounce-back position, pull and hold the switch up
and the window will travel up with no bounce-back or pinch
protection. If the switch is released before the window is fully closed,
the window will stop. For example, this can be used to overcome the
resistance of ice on the window or seals.
Driver Controls
76
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Window lock
The window lock feature allows only
the driver to operate the power
windows.
To lock out all the window controls
(except for the driver’s) press the
right side of the control. Press the
left side to restore the window
controls.
Accessory delay
With accessory delay, the radio, power windows, and moon roof (if
equipped) operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned from on to off or until one of the front doors are opened.
POWER REAR SUNSHADE (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
power rear sunshade that covers the
rear window of your vehicle. The
control is located in the center
console access bin next to the
power point.
Press the control to move the shade
up or down.
The power sunshade is equipped
with an automatic, one-touch, auto
down feature. To stop motion at any time during the auto down
operation, press the control a second time. To activate the automatic,
one-touch, auto down feature, press the control and release quickly.
INTERIOR MIRROR
The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm
which lets you adjust the mirror up or down and from side to side.
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
Driver Controls
77
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror
Your vehicle is equipped with an interior rear view mirror and a driver’s
side exterior mirror that have auto-dimming function. The electronic
day/night mirrors will change from the normal (high reflective) state to
the non-glare (darkened) state when bright lights (glare) reach the
interior mirror. When the interior mirror detects bright light from behind
the vehicle, the interior rear view mirror and the driver’s side exterior
mirror will automatically adjust (darken) to minimize glare.
The mirrors will automatically return to the normal state whenever the
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view when
backing up.
Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior
rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror
performance.
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power side view mirrors
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Rotate the control clockwise to
adjust the right mirror and rotate
the control counterclockwise to
adjust the left mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
Automatic dimming feature
The driver’s side view mirror has an auto-dimming function. For more
information, refer to Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror in
this chapter.
Blind spot mirrors (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with blind spot mirrors. See Blind spot
mirrors in the Driving chapter.
Driver Controls
78
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Heated outside mirrors
Both mirrors are heated
automatically to remove ice, mist
and fog when the rear window
defrost is activated.
Note: With the Auto dimming
feature, the mirror glass is thicker
and will take longer to defrost.
Do not remove ice from the
mirrors with a scraper or attempt to readjust the mirror glass if
it is frozen in place. These actions could cause damage to the
glass and mirrors.
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
SPEED CONTROL
With speed control set, you can maintain a set speed without keeping
your foot on the accelerator pedal.
WARNING: Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Using speed control
The speed controls are located on the steering wheel. The following
buttons work with speed control:
RESUME: Press to resume a set
speed.
SET +: Press to increase the set
speed.
SET–:Press to decrease the set
speed.
OFF/ON: Press to turn speed
control off or on.
Setting speed control
To set speed control:
1. Press and release ON.
Driver Controls
79
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press and release SET + or SET -.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
5. The indicator
light on the instrument cluster will turn on.
Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
Disengaging speed control
Press the brake pedal to disengage the speed control. Disengaging the
speed control will not erase the previous set speed.
Resuming a set speed
Press and release RESUME. This will automatically return the vehicle to
the previously set speed.
Increasing speed while using speed control
To set a higher speed:
• Press and hold SET + until you get to the desired speed, then release.
You can also use SET + to operate the tap-up function. Press and
release SET + to increase the vehicle set speed in 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
increments.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed then press and
release SET +.
Reducing speed while using speed control
To reduce a set speed:
• Press and hold SET – until you get to the desired speed, then release.
You can also use SET – to operate the tap-down function. Press and
release SET – to decrease the vehicle set speed in 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
increments.
• Press the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached then
press SET –.
Turning off speed control
To turn off the speed control, Press OFF or turn off the ignition.
Driver Controls
80
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: When you turn off the speed control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) (IF EQUIPPED)
Adaptive cruise control is much like speed control, only this system is
designed to automatically adjust your speed to maintain a proper
distance between you and the vehicle in front of you in the same lane.
The driver can select from one of three GAP settings, the controls are
located on the steering wheel.
At startup, the system sets the gap
to the last selected setting. Once
activated, the driver can deactivate
the system at any time by either
pressing the brake pedal or pressing
the steering wheel ON/OFF control. In addition, the driver can
temporarily increase the vehicle speed above the current speed by
manually pressing on the accelerator pedal.
WARNING: Always pay close attention to changing road
conditions, especially when using Adaptive Cruise Control.
Adaptive Cruise Control cannot replace attentive driving. Failing to
follow any of the warnings below or failing to pay attention to the road
may result in a collision, serious injury or death.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control is not a collision warning or
avoidance system. Additionally, adaptive cruise control will not
detect:
• Stationary or slow moving vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
WARNING: Do not use the adaptive cruise control when
entering or leaving a highway, in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery or unpaved.
WARNING: Do not use in poor visibility, specifically fog, rain,
spray or snow.
Driver Controls
81
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Setting adaptive cruise control
Note: It is the drivers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in
control of the vehicle at all times.
The controls for using your cruise
control are located on the steering
wheel.
1. Press and release the ON control.
The message center will display
CRUISE ON RADAR READY.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press and release the SET +
control. The vehicle speed will be
stored in the memory and the
message center will display SET
XXX MPH (your desired speed).
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
5. The green
cruise indicator
light on the instrument cluster will
illuminate if there are no vehicles
detected in front of you, while the yellow
ACC indicator light on the
instrument cluster will illuminate if there is a vehicle detected in front of
you.
Following a vehicle
WARNING: When following a vehicle in front of you, the vehicle
will not decelerate automatically to a stop, nor will the vehicle
always decelerate quickly enough to avoid a collision without driver
intervention. Always apply the brakes when necessary. Failing to do so
may result in a collision, serious injury or death.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the same lane or a slower vehicle is
ahead in the same lane, the vehicle speed will adjust automatically to
maintain a preset gap distance. The distance setting is adjustable, refer
to Setting the gap distance in this section.
Driver Controls
82
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The yellow ACC indicator light
in the instrument cluster will be
illuminated and the message center
will temporarily display a preset
GAP <--->.
The vehicle will maintain a constant distance between the vehicle ahead
until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out of your lane or out of view.
• The vehicle speed falls below 18 mph (30 km/h).
• A new gap distance is set.
The vehicle brakes will be automatically applied to slow the vehicle to
maintain a safe distance between the vehicle in front. The maximum
braking which is applied by the ACC system is limited and can be
overridden by the driver applying the brakes.
If the ACC system predicts that its
maximum braking level will not be
sufficient, an audible warning will
sound while the ACC continues to
brake. This is accompanied by a red
warning bar appearing in the
windshield. The driver should take immediate action.
Note: The brakes may emit a sound when they are being modulated by
the adaptive cruise control system.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control only warns of vehicles
detected by the radar sensor. In some cases there may be no
warning or the warning may be delayed. The driver should always
apply the brakes when necessary. Failing to do so may result in a
collision, serious injury or death.
Driver Controls
83
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Setting the gap distance
The distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front of you can
be decreased or increased by
pressing <---> control. GAP <--->
will be displayed in the message
center. Three gap distance settings
are available:
Message
Center Display
Following
distance
Following
distance at
60 mph
(96 km/h)
Dynamic
behavior
GAP <-> 1 second 29 yards (26 m) Sporty
GAP <---> 1.5 seconds 44 yards (40 m) Normal
GAP <-----> 2.3 seconds 66 yards (60 m) Comfort
Each time the vehicle is restarted, the last chosen gap will be
automatically selected.
Note: It is the driver’s responsibility to select a gap appropriate to the
driving conditions.
Disengaging adaptive cruise control
Press the brake pedal to disengage the adaptive cruise control. CRUISE
CANCELLED will be displayed in the message center.
Disengaging the adaptive cruise control will not erase your previous set
speed.
Overriding adaptive cruise control
WARNING: Whenever the driver is overriding the ACC by
pressing the accelerator pedal, the ACC will not automatically
apply the brakes to maintain separation from any vehicle ahead.
The set speed and gap distance can be overridden by pressing the
accelerator pedal.
When the driver is overriding ACC, the green
cruise indicator light
is illuminated, and CRUISE OVERRIDE is displayed in the message
Driver Controls
84
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
center. When the accelerator is released, the ACC function will operate
again and vehicle speed will decrease to the set speed, or a lower speed
if following a slower vehicle.
Changing the set speed
There are three ways to change the
set speed:
• Accelerate or brake to the
desired speed and press and
release the SET + or SET –
control
• Increase or decrease the speed by
holding either the SET + or SET
– control, until the desired set
speed is shown on the message
center. The vehicle speed will gradually change to the selected speed.
• Increase or decrease the speed in increments of 1 mph (2 km/h) by
briefly pressing the SET + or SET – control.
The ACC may apply the brakes to slow the vehicle down to the new set
speed. The set speed will display continuously in the message center
while ACC is active.
Resuming the set speed
Press and release the RESUME
control. This will automatically
return the vehicle to the previously
set speed. The set speed will display
continuously in the message center
while ACC is active.
Note: RESUME should only be used
if the driver is aware of the set
speed and intends to return to it.
Low speed automatic cancellation
ACC is not functional at vehicle speeds below 18 mph (30 km/h). Once
the vehicle speed drops below 18 mph (30 km/h), an audible alarm will
sound, the head’s up display will flash and the automatic braking will be
released.
Driver Controls
85
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Hilly condition usage
It is recommended that the driver select a lower gear position when ACC
is active in situations such as prolonged downhill driving on steep grades
(i.e., driving in mountainous areas). In these situations, additional engine
braking is needed to reduce the load on the vehicle’s regular brake
system to prevent them from overheating. For more information,
reference Automatic transmission operation in the Driving chapter.
Note: If ACC is applying brakes for an extended period of time, an
audible alarm will sound, the head’s up display will flash and ACC will
shut down. This is to allow the brakes to cool down. When the brakes
have cooled down, the ACC will again function normally.
Turning off cruise control
Press the OFF button to turn off the
cruise control.
Note: When you turn off the cruise
control or the ignition, your cruise
control set speed memory is erased.
Detection issues
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In some situations it may
not detect vehicles at all or detect a vehicle later than expected.
Detection issues can occur:
• When driving on a different line than the vehicle in front.
Driver Controls
86
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• With vehicles that edge into your lane. These vehicles can only be
detected once they have moved fully into your lane.
• There may be issues with the detection of vehicles in front when
driving into and coming out of a bend or curve in the road.
In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver should
stay alert and intervene when necessary.
ACC Not Available
Several conditions exist which can cause ACC to deactivate or prevent
ACC from activating when requested. These conditions include:
• The sensor is blocked, refer to Blocked sensor in this section.
• Brake temperature is high, refer to Hilly condition usage in this
section.
• A failure has occurred in the ACC system or related system.
Driver Controls
87
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Blocked sensor
If a message regarding a blocked
sensor is displayed, the radar signals
from the sensor have been
obstructed. The sensor is located
behind a fascia cover near the driver
side of the lower grille. When the
radar signals are obstructed, a
vehicle ahead cannot be detected
and the ACC will not function. The
following table lists possible causes
and actions for this message being displayed.
Cause Action
The surface of the radar in the
grille is dirty or obstructed in
some way
Clean the grille surface in front of
the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction
The surface of the radar in the
grille is clean but the message
remains in the display
Wait a short time. It may take
several minutes for the radar to
detect that it is no longer
obstructed
Heavy rain or snow is interfering
with the radar signals
Do not use ACC in these
conditions because it may not
detect, warn, or respond to
potential collisions.
Swirling water, or snow or ice on
the surface of the road may
interfere with the radar signals
Do not use ACC in these
conditions because it may not
detect, warn, or respond to
potential collisions.
WARNING: Do not use ACC when towing a trailer with brake
controls. Aftermarket trailer brakes will not function properly
when ACC is activated because the brakes are electronically controlled.
Failing to do so may result in loss of vehicle control, which could result
in serious injury.
Driver Controls
88
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Do not use tires sizes other than those
recommended because this can affect the normal operation of
ACC. Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control, which
could result in serious injury.
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS
Radio control features
Press MEDIA to select:
• AM, FM1, FM2, or CD
• SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 (Satellite
Radio mode).
• LINE IN (Auxiliary input jack)
In Radio mode:
• Press
to access the
next/previous preset station.
In CD mode:
• Press
to listen to the
next track on the disc.
In Satellite radio mode:
• Press
to advance
through preset channels.
Driver Controls
89
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
In any mode:
• Press VOL + or VOL - to adjust
the volume.
SYNC威 system hands free
control feature
Press
briefly to use the voice
command feature. You will hear a
tone and LISTENING will appear in
the radio display. Press and
hold
to exit voice command.
Press
to activate phone mode or
answer a phone call. Press and
hold
to end call or exit phone
mode.
Press
to scroll through various menus and selections. Press
OK to confirm your selection.
For further information on the SYNC威 system, refer to the SYNC威
supplement.
Navigation system/SYNC威 hands
free control features (if
equipped)
Press
control briefly until the
voice icon appears on the
Navigation display to use the voice
command feature.
Press
to activate phone mode or
answer a phone call. Press and
hold
to exit phone mode or end
call.
Driver Controls
90
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
For further information on the Navigation system/SYNC威 system, refer to
the Navigation System and SYNC威 supplements.
DUAL PANEL MOON ROOF AND POWER SUNSCREEN
(IF EQUIPPED)
The dual panel moon roof and power sunscreen controls are located on
the overhead console.
WARNING: Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave
children unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt
themselves.
The dual panel moon roof and power sunscreen are equipped with an
automatic, one-touch, express opening and closing feature. To stop
motion at any time during the one-touch operation, press the control a
second time.
To open the sunscreen: Press and
release the
control. The
sunscreen will automatically open.
Note: For the dual panel moon roof,
the sunscreen stops at the first
panel. Press and hold to continue to
open the sunscreen past the second
panel.
To close the sunscreen: Pull down the
control and release. The
sunscreen will automatically close. If the moon roof is open, it will
automatically close prior to closing the sunscreen.
To open the dual panel moon
roof: Press and release the SLIDE
control. The moon roof will
automatically open. If the sunscreen
is closed, it will automatically open
prior to opening the moon roof.
WARNING: When closing the dual panel moon roof, you should
verify that it is free of obstructions and ensure that children
and/or pets are not in the proximity of the roof opening.
Driver Controls
91
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To close the dual panel moon roof: Pull down the SLIDE control and
release. The moon roof will automatically close.
Bounce-back: When an obstacle has been detected in the moon roof
opening as the moon roof is closing, the moon roof will automatically
open and stop at a prescribed position.
Bounce-back override: To override bounce-back function, pull and hold
the SLIDE switch within two seconds of a bounce-back event. The
closing force will begin to increase each time the moon roof is closed for
the first three closing cycles, with bounce-back active. For example:
Bounce-back can be used to overcome the resistance of ice on the moon
roof or seals.
To vent the dual panel moon roof: Press and quickly release the TILT
control (moon roof is equipped with, automatic, one-touch, tilt open
feature). The moon roof must be in the closed position in order to
move it into the vent position.
To close dual panel moon roof from vent: Pull and quickly release
the TILT control down to close the glass from the vent position to close
(moon roof is equipped with automatic, one-touch, tilt close feature).
Note: You can open and close the vehicle’s windows and moon roof (if
equipped) by using the control on the remote transmitter. Refer to
Power windows earlier in this chapter.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (IF EQUIPPED)
The appearance of your vehicle’s universal garage door opener will vary
according to your option package. Before programing, make sure your
transmitter matches the graphic in the procedure.
HomeLink威
Driver Controls
92
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Car2U威 Home Automation
System
HomeLink姞 Wireless Control System (if equipped)
The HomeLink威 Wireless Control
System, located on the driver’s visor,
provides a convenient way to
replace up to three hand-held
transmitters with a single built-in
device. This feature will learn the
radio frequency codes of most
transmitters to operate garage
doors, entry gate operators, security systems, entry door locks, and
home or office lighting.
WARNING: When programming your HomeLink威 Wireless
Control System to a garage door or gate, be sure that people and
objects are out of the way to prevent potential injury or damage.
Do not use the HomeLink威 Wireless Control System with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot
detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact
HomeLink威 at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for
future programming procedures (i.e. new HomeLink威 equipped vehicle
purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed Homelink威 buttons be erased for security purposes, refer to
Programming in this section.
Programming
Do not program HomeLink威 with the vehicle parked in the garage.
Driver Controls
93
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the
accessory position for programming and/or operation of the HomeLink威.
It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink威 for quicker
training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
1. Position the end of your
hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches
(2–8 cm) away from the HomeLink威
button you wish to program (located
on your visor) while keeping the
indicator light in view.
2. Simultaneously press and hold
both the chosen HomeLink威 and
hand-held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink威 indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. Now you may release
both the HomeLink威 and hand-held transmitter buttons.
Note: Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to
replace Step 2 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator and
Canadian Programming in this section for Canadian residents.
3. Firmly press and hold for five seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink威 button up to two separate times to activate the
door. If the door does not activate, press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink威 button and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed
and released.
• If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns
to a constant light continue with “Programming” Steps 4 through
6 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device (most
commonly a garage door opener).
4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the unit).
5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and
color of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 6.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the programmed HomeLink威 button. Repeat the
press/hold/release sequence again and, depending on the brand of the
garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
Driver Controls
94
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
HomeLink威 should now activate your rolling code equipped device. To
program additional HomeLink威 buttons begin with Step 1 in this section.
For questions or comments, please contact HomeLink威 at
www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Gate Operator & Canadian Programming
During programming, your
hand-held transmitter may
automatically stop transmitting —
not allowing enough time for
HomeLink威 to accept the signal
from the hand-held transmitter.
After completing Step 1 outlined in
the Programming section, replace
Step 2 with the following:
Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is
advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent
overheating.
• Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button (note Step 2 in the
Programming section) while you press and release — every two
seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency
signal has been accepted by the HomeLink威. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink威 accepts the radio
frequency signal.
• Proceed with Step 3 in the Programming section.
Operating the HomeLink姞 Wireless Control System
To operate, simply press and release
the appropriate HomeLink威 button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, gate
operator, security system, entry
door lock, or home or office lighting
etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515.
Driver Controls
95
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Erasing HomeLink姞 buttons
To erase the three programmed
buttons (individual buttons cannot
be erased):
• Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink威 buttons until the
indicator light begins to
flash-after 20 seconds. Release
both buttons. Do not hold for
longer that 30 seconds.
HomeLink威 is now in the train (or learning) mode and can be
programmed at any time beginning with Step 1 in the Programming
section.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink姞 button
To program a device to HomeLink威 using a HomeLink威 button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button. Do NOT release the
button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the HomeLink威 button, follow Step 1 in the Programming
section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com
or 1–800–355–3515.
Car2U姞 Home Automation System (if equipped)
The Car2U威 Home Automation
System is a universal transmitter
located in the driver’s visor that
includes two primary features – a
garage door opener and a platform
for remote activation of devices
within the home. The Car2U威
system’s garage door opener
function replaces the common
hand-held garage door opener with a three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the interior of your vehicle. After being programmed for
garage doors, the Car2U威 system transmitter can be programmed to
operate security devices and home lighting systems.
Driver Controls
96
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Make sure that people and objects are clear of the
garage door or security device you are programming. Do not
program the Car2U威 system with the vehicle in the garage.
Do not use the Car2U威 system with any garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door opener manufactured before
April 1, 1982).
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future Car2U威 system programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle, the
programmed Car2U威 system buttons should be erased for security
reasons. Refer to Erasing the Car2U威 Home Automation System
buttons later in this section.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the
Car2U威 system. Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to have
another person assist you in programming the transmitter.
Additional Car2U威 system information can be found on-line at
www.learcar2U.com or by calling the toll-free Car2U威 system help line at
1-866-572-2728.
Types of garage door openers (rolling code and fixed code)
The Car2U威 Home Automation System may be programmed to operate
rolling code and fixed code garage door openers.
• Rolling code garage door openers were produced after 1996 and are
code protected. Rolling code means the coded signal is changed every
time your remote control garage door opener is used.
• Fixed code garage door openers were produced prior to 1996. Fixed
code uses the same coded signal every time. It is manually
programmed by setting DIP switches for a unique personal code.
Driver Controls
97
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you do not know if your garage
door opener is a rolling code or
fixed code device, open your garage
door opener’s remote control battery
cover. If a panel of DIP switches is
present your garage door opener is
a fixed code device. If not, your
garage door opener is a rolling code
device.
Rolling code programming
Note: Programming the rolling code garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions. Read the entire procedure prior to beginning so
you will know which actions are time-sensitive. If you do not follow the
time-sensitive actions, the device will time out and you will have to
repeat the procedure.
Note: Do not program the Car2U威 system with the vehicle in the garage.
Make sure that your key is on and engine off while programming the
transmitter.
1. Firmly press the two outer
Car2U威 system buttons for
1–2 seconds, then release.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
1
1
1
2
C
TS
206-12
T
124
O
N
Driver Controls
98
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Go to the garage to locate the
garage door opener motor and its
“learn” button. You may need a
ladder to reach the unit and you
may need to remove the unit’s cover
or light lens to locate the “learn”
button. Press the “learn” button,
after which you will have
10–30 seconds to return to your
vehicle and complete the following
steps. If you cannot locate the
“learn” button, refer to the Owner’s Guide of your garage door opener or
call the toll-free Car2U威 system help line at 1-866-57Car2U
(1-866-572-2728).
3. Return to your vehicle. Press and
hold the Car2U威 system button you
would like to use to control the
garage door. You may need to hold
the button from 5–20 seconds,
during which time the selected
button indicator light will blink
slowly. Immediately (within
1 second) release the button once the garage door moves. When the
button is released, the indicator light will begin to blink rapidly until
programming is complete.
4. Press and release the button again. The garage door should move,
confirming that programming is successful. If your garage door does not
operate, repeat the previous steps in this section.
After successful programming, you will be able to operate your Car2U威
system by pressing the button you programmed to activate the opener.
The indicator light above the selected button will turn on to confirm that
the Car2U威 system is responding to the button command.
To program another rolling code device such as an additional garage door
opener, a security device or home lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 4
substituting a different function button in Step 3 than what you used for
the garage door opener. For example, you could assign the left-most
button to the garage door, the center button to a security device, and
the right-most button to another garage door opener.
Driver Controls
99
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: The Car2U威 system allows for three devices to be programmed. If
you need to change or replace any of the three devices after it has been
initially programmed, it is necessary to erase the current settings using
the Erasing the Car2U威 Home Automation System buttons procedure
and then programming all of the devices being used.
Fixed code programming
Note: Do not program the Car2U威 system with the vehicle in the garage.
Make sure that your key is on and engine off while programming the
transmitter.
1. To program units with fixed code DIP switches, you will need the
garage door hand-held transmitter, paper and a pen or pencil.
2. Open the battery cover and record the switch settings from left to
right for all 8 to 12 switches. Use the figure below:
When a switch is in the up, on, or + position, circle “L.”
When a switch is in the middle, neutral, or 0 position, circle “M.”
When a switch is in the down, off, or – position, circle “R.”
Switch
position 12345678 9101112
Up, on
or +
LLLLLLLLLLLL
Middle,
neutral
or 0
MMMMMMMMMMMM
Down,
offor–
RRRRRRRRRRRR
L=left; M=middle; R=right
Driver Controls
100
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. To input these positions into the
Car2U威 system, simultaneously
press all three Car2U威 system
buttons for a few seconds and then
release to put the device into
programming mode. The indicator
lights will blink slowly. Within
2.5 minutes enter your
corresponding DIP switch settings
from left to right into your Car2U威 system by pressing and releasing the
buttons corresponding to the settings you circled.
4. After inputting switch settings, simultaneously press and release all
three Car2U威 system buttons. The indicator lights will turn on.
5. Press and hold the Car2U威
system button you would like to use
to control the garage door.
Immediately (within 1 second)
release the button once the garage
door moves. During this time the
selected button indicator light will
blink slowly. Do not release the
button until you see the garage door move. Most garage doors open
quickly. You may need to hold the button from 5–55 seconds before
observing movement of the garage door.
6. The indicator light will (begin to) blink rapidly until programming is
complete. If your garage door opener does not operate following these
steps, repeat Steps 2 through 6. Otherwise, call the toll-free Car2U威 help
line at 1-866-57Car2U (1-866-572-2728).
After successful programming, you will be able to operate your Car2U威
system by pressing the button you programmed to activate the opener.
The indicator light above the selected button will turn on to confirm that
the Car2U威 system is responding to the button command.
Erasing the Car2U姞 Home Automation System buttons
Note: The system allows for three devices to be programmed. If you
need to change or replace any of the three devices after it has been
initially programmed, it will be necessary to erase the current settings
using the procedure below and then reprogramming all of the devices
being used.
Driver Controls
101
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To erase programming on the Car2U威 system (individual buttons cannot
be erased), use the following procedure:
1. Firmly press the two outside
Car2U威 system buttons
simultaneously for approximately
20 seconds until the indicator lights
begin to blink rapidly. The indicator
lights are located directly above the
buttons.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to
blink, release your fingers from the
buttons. The codes for all buttons
are erased.
If you sell your vehicle equipped with the Car2U威 system, it is
recommended that you erase the programming for security reasons.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada Compliance
The Car2U威 system complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
This device must accept any interference received including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Changes and modifications to the Car2U威 system transmitter by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use the
equipment.
Driver Controls
102
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INTERIOR TRUNK CONTROL
The trunk release button is located
in the glove box. Open the glove
box to access it and press the
button to open the trunk.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo net (if equipped)
The cargo net secures lightweight
objects in the cargo area. Attach the
net to the anchors provided. Do not
put more than 50 lb. (22 kg) in the
net.
WARNING: This net is not
designed to restrain objects
during a collision.
Driver Controls
103
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
KEYS
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs) (If equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with
two Integrated Keyhead
Transmitters (IKTs). The key blade
functions as a programmed key
which starts the vehicle and
unlocks/locks all the doors. The
transmitter portion functions as the
remote entry transmitter.
Your IKTs are programmed to your
vehicle; using a non-programmed
key will not permit your vehicle to
start. If you lose one or both of your
IKTs, replacements are available
through your authorized dealer.
Standard SecuriLock威 keys without
remote entry transmitter
functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if
desired.
Always carry a spare key with you in case of an emergency.
For more information regarding programming replacement IKTs, refer to
the SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system section later in this chapter.
Note: Your vehicle’s IKTs were
issued with a security tag that
provides important vehicle key cut
information. It is recommended that
you keep the tag in a safe place for
future reference.
Locks and Security
104
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Intelligent Access Key (IA key) (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with
two Intelligent Access keys which
operate the power locks and the
remote entry system. You have to
have the IA key in the vehicle to
activate the push button start
system.
The IA key also contains a
removable mechanical key blade
that can be used to unlock the
driver door. To release the
mechanical key blade, press the
release button on the back of the
transmitter and slide the blade out.
Your IA keys are programmed to
your vehicle. You cannot enter or
start your vehicle with an
unprogrammed key. If you lose one
or both of your IA keys,
replacements are available from
your authorized dealer. For more
information on programming
replacement IA keys, refer to the
SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system section in this chapter.
Note: Your vehicle’s IA backup keys
were issued with a security tag that
provides important vehicle key cut
information. It is recommended that
you keep the tag in a safe place for
future reference.
Locks and Security
105
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
POWER DOOR LOCKS
• Press the control to unlock all
doors.
• Press the
control to lock all
doors.
Smart unlocks
This feature helps to prevent you from locking yourself out of the vehicle
if your key is still in the ignition.
When you open one of the front doors and you lock the vehicle with the
power door lock control (on the driver or passenger door trim panel), all
the doors will lock, then all doors will automatically unlock reminding
you that your key is still in the ignition.
The vehicle can still be locked, with the key in the ignition, by locking
the driver’s door with a key, using the
control on the transmitter, or
locking the vehicle with the keyless entry keypad.
If both front doors are closed, the vehicle can be locked by any method,
regardless of whether the key is in the ignition or not.
Smart unlocks for Intelligent Access Keys (if equipped)
The smart unlock feature is intended to prevent you from unintentionally
locking your IA key inside your vehicle’s passenger compartment or
trunk.
When you lock your vehicle using the driver or passenger power door
lock control (with the door open), after you close the door the vehicle
will search for an IA key in the passenger compartment. If an IA key is
found inside the vehicle, all of the doors will immediately unlock and the
horn will chirp, indicating that the IA key is inside.
In order to override the smart unlock feature and intentionally lock the
IA key inside the vehicle, you can lock your vehicle using your keyless
entry keypad or using the
control on another IA key. Refer to Keyless
entry system in this chapter for more information on keyless entry
keypad operation.
If your vehicle’s perimeter alarm is in the armed state, the smart unlock
feature will not allow you to lock your IA key inside the trunk. When the
alarm is armed, if the IA key is detected in the trunk, the decklid will
Locks and Security
106
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
automatically be released when you attempt to close it, and the horn will
chirp, as a reminder that the IA key is inside. If you would like to
intentionally lock your IA key in the trunk of your vehicle, first disarm
the perimeter alarm by unlocking the vehicle, then place the IA key in
the trunk, close the trunk, and rearm your perimeter alarm system by
locking the vehicle using your keyless entry keypad or another IA key.
For more information on arming/disarming of the perimeter alarm
system, refer to Perimeter alarm system in this chapter.
Opening windows and moon roof (if equipped)
You can open the vehicle’s windows, and (if equipped) vent the moon
roof (power shade opens) by using the
control on the transmitter.
Refer to Power windows in the Driver Controls chapter for more
information.
Closing windows and moon roof (if equipped)
You can close the vehicle’s windows and moon roof (if equipped) by
using the
control on the transmitter. Refer to Power windows in the
Driver Controls chapter for more information.
Central locking/Two-stage unlocking
When unlocking the driver door with the key, turn it once toward the
rear of the vehicle to unlock that door only, if the two-stage unlocking is
enabled. Turn the key a second time to unlock all doors. When locking,
turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to lock all doors.
Two-stage unlocking may be disabled and re-enabled (to allow all vehicle
doors to unlock simultaneously) by simultaneously pressing
the
and controls on the transmitter for four seconds.
Note: The turn lamps will flash twice to confirm that a change to the
feature has occurred.
Autolock feature
The autolock feature will lock all the doors when:
• all the doors are closed,
• the ignition is on,
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Locks and Security
107
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The autolock feature repeats when:
• any door is opened then closed while the ignition is on and the vehicle
speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
• the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Deactivating/activating autolock feature
Your vehicle comes with the autolock features activated; there are four
methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer,
• by using a power door unlock/lock procedure,
• using a keypad procedure, or
• by using the instrument cluster message center. Refer to Message
center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Note: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently
of the autounlock feature.
Power door lock switch autolock enable/disable procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is off and all vehicle doors are closed.
You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait a
minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition off.
4. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
5. Turn the ignition back on. The horn will chirp one time to confirm
programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. To enable/disable the autolock feature, press the unlock control, then
press the lock control. The horn will chirp once if autolock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition off. The horn will chirp once to confirm the
procedure is complete.
Locks and Security
108
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Keyless entry keypad autolock enable/disable procedure
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry
code.
4. Press and hold the 3 • 4. While
holding the 3 • 4pressthe7• 8.
5. Release the 7 • 8.
6. Release the 3 • 4.
The user will receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
Autounlock feature
The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when:
• the ignition is on, all the doors are closed, and the vehicle has been in
motion at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h);
• the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned off or to
accessory; and
• the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being
turned off or to accessory.
Note: The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been
electronically locked before the driver door is opened.
Deactivating/activating autounlock feature
Your vehicle comes with the autounlock features activated; there are four
methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer,
• by using a power door unlock/lock sequence,
• using a keypad procedure, or
• by using the instrument cluster message center. Refer to Message
center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Locks and Security
109
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: The autounlock feature can be activated/deactivated
independently of the autolock feature.
Power door lock switch autounlock enable/disable procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is off and all vehicle doors are closed.
You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait a
minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition off.
4. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
5. Turn the ignition back on. The horn will chirp one time to confirm
programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. To enable/disable the autounlock feature, press the lock control, then
press the unlock control. The horn will chirp once if autounlock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autounlock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition off. The horn will chirp once to confirm the
procedure is complete.
Locks and Security
110
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Keyless entry keypad autounlock enable/disable procedure
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry
code.
4. Press and hold the 3 • 4. While
holding the 3 • 4, press and release
the 7 • 8. While still holding the 3 •
4, press and release the 7 • 8a
second time.
5. Release the 3 • 4.
The user will receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS
• When these locks are set, the
rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside.
• The rear doors can be opened
from the outside when the doors
are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock
for both doors.
• Insert the key and turn to the
lock position (key horizontal) to
engage the childproof locks.
• Insert the key and turn to the
unlock position (key vertical) to
disengage the childproof locks.
Locks and Security
111
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INTERIOR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT RELEASE
Your vehicle is equipped with a mechanical interior luggage compartment
release handle that provides a means of escape for children and adults in
the event they become locked inside the luggage compartment.
Adults are advised to familiarize themselves with the operation and
location of the release handle.
To open the luggage compartment
door (lid) from within the luggage
compartment, pull the illuminated
“T” shaped handle and push up on
the trunk lid. The handle is
composed of a material that will
glow for hours in darkness following
brief exposure to ambient light.
The “T” shaped handle will be
located either on the luggage
compartment door (lid) or inside
the luggage compartment near the
tail lamps.
WARNING: Keep vehicle
doors and luggage
compartment locked and keep
keys and remote transmitters out
of a child’s reach. Unsupervised
children could lock themselves in
the trunk and risk injury. Children
should be taught not to play in
vehicles.
Locks and Security
112
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot days, the temperature in the
trunk or vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or
animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause
death or serious heat-related injuries, including brain damage. Small
children are particularly at risk.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM
The Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs) and Intelligent Access keys
(IA key) comply with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Integrated Keyhead
Transmitters
Locks and Security
113
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Intelligent Access key
Refer to Intelligent Access in this
section for more features.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 feet
(10 meters). A decrease in operating range could be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,
• structures around the vehicle, or
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
The transmitter allows you to:
• remotely unlock the vehicle doors.
• remotely lock all the vehicle doors.
• remotely open the trunk.
• activate the personal alarm.
• arm and disarm the perimeter anti-theft system.
• operate the illuminated entry feature.
• activate the global opening windows feature.
The remote entry lock/unlock feature operates in any ignition position
except while the vehicle is in the start position. The panic feature
operates with the ignition off.
If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take
ALL Integrated Keyhead Transmitters or Intelligent Access keys
with you to the authorized dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the
problem.
Locks and Security
114
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Intelligent Access (if equipped)
WARNING: Radio waves from the Intelligent Access system
transmitters in the vehicle may affect certain implanted medical
devices such as pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators. People having
such implanted medical devices should ask the medical device
manufacturer or their physician whether the Intelligent Access system
may affect the equipment before coming into close proximity with a
vehicle equipped with Intelligent Access. Failure to do so may result in
interference with the medical device, which could result in serious
injury.
Your vehicle will allow you to unlock and enter your vehicle without
actively using a key or transmitter. You can use the Intelligent Access
feature at the driver door or at the trunk. You can activate the Intelligent
Access feature as long as you have one of your Intelligent Access Keys
within range of the driver door or the trunk.
Activating Intelligent Access at the Driver’s Door: If your IA key is
within 3 feet (1 meter) of the drivers door, you can activate your
Intelligent Access system by pressing any button on the keyless entry
keypad. The drivers door will automatically unlock and the door can be
opened.
(Note: If two stage unlocking is disabled, all doors will unlock when you
press any button on the keyless entry keypad).
Activating Intelligent Access at the Trunk: If your IA key is within
3 feet (1 meter) of the trunk, you can activate your Intelligent Access
system by pressing the exterior trunk release button, hidden under the
trim above the license plate. The trunk will release and open.
Refer to the Remote entry system in this section for more details on
how to use the lock, unlock, panic, or trunk buttons on the transmitter.
Your Intelligent Access system uses a radio frequency (RF) signal to
communicate with your vehicle and authorize your vehicle to unlock
when commanded (either by pressing any keyless entry keypad button,
the trunk button, or a button on the transmitter itself). If excessive RF
interference is present in the area, or if your vehicle battery is low, it
may be necessary to mechanically unlock your door. The mechanical key
blade in your IA key can be used to open the driver’s door in this
situation (refer to Intelligent access key in this chapter for more
information on the location and use of the mechanical key blade).
A mechanical key is needed for access if the IA key battery or vehicle
battery is low.
Locks and Security
115
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Push button start: Your vehicle is equipped with a push button start
system, which allows you to start your vehicle without using a key. To
operate the push button start system and start your vehicle, your IA key
must be present inside the vehicle, either in the passenger compartment
or in the trunk. Refer to Push button start in the Driving chapter.
Unlocking the doors/two stage unlock
1. Press and release to unlock the driver’s door.
Note: The interior lamps and parking lamps will illuminate.
2. Press
and release again within three seconds to unlock all the
doors.
The remote entry system activates the illuminated entry feature; this
feature turns on the lamps for 25 seconds or until the ignition is turned
on.
The battery saver feature will turn off the lamps 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned off.
Two stage unlocking may be disabled or re-enabled by simultaneously
pressing the
and controls on the transmitter for four seconds
(disabling two stage unlock allows all vehicle doors to unlock
simultaneously). The parking lamps will illuminate twice to indicate that
two-stage unlock was enabled or disabled.
If equipped with IA key, when two stage unlocking is disabled, intelligent
access at the driver’s door results in an unlock of all doors (not just the
driver door).
Locking the doors
1. Press and release to lock all the doors. The parking lamps will
illuminate.
2. Press
and release again within three seconds to confirm that all
the doors are closed. Note: The doors will lock again, the horn will chirp
and the turn lamps will illuminate if all the doors and trunk are closed.
Note: If any door or the trunk is not closed, the horn will chirp twice
and the turn lamps will not illuminate.
Car finder
Press
twice within three seconds. The horn will chirp and the turn
lamps will flash. It is recommended that this method be used to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
Locks and Security
116
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Sounding a panic alarm
Press
to activate the alarm. The horn will sound and the turn lamps
will flash for a maximum of three minutes. Press again or turn the
ignition on to deactivate, or wait for the alarm to time out in three
minutes.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is off.
Opening the trunk
Press
twice within three seconds to open the trunk.
• Ensure that the trunk is closed and latched before driving your
vehicle. Failure to properly latch the trunk may cause objects to fall
out or block the driver’s rear view.
The remote entry system allows you to open the trunk while the ignition
is in any position. However, if the ignition is on and the gearshift is in D
(Drive), the trunk will only open if the vehicle is moving 3 mph (5 km/h)
or slower.
Memory seats/power mirrors/steering column
The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) or Intelligent Access key (IA
key) allows you to recall the memory seat/power mirrors/steering column
feature.
Press
on the transmitter to automatically move the seat, mirrors and
steering column to the desired memory position.
Note: The seat will not travel to its final position if the key is not in the
ignition (if equipped) and the easy entry feature is enabled.
Activating the memory feature
To activate this feature:
1. Position the seat, mirrors, and steering column to the desired
positions.
Locks and Security
117
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Press and hold either the 1 or 2
control on the driver’s door for five
seconds. (A tone will be heard after
1
1
⁄
2
seconds when the memory store
is done) continue to hold until a
second tone is heard after five
seconds.
3. Within three seconds press
the
on the transmitter.
4. A tone will be heard when the
activation is complete.
5. Repeat this procedure for another transmitter if desired.
Deactivating the memory feature
To deactivate this feature:
1. Press and hold either the 1 or 2 control on the driver’s door for five
seconds. (A tone will be heard after 1
1
⁄
2
seconds when the memory store
is done) continue to hold until a second tone is heard after five seconds.
2. Within three seconds press the
on the transmitter.
3. A tone will be heard when the deactivation is complete.
4. Repeat this procedure for another transmitter if desired.
Replacing the battery
The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) or Intelligent Access key (IA
key) uses one coin type three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent.
To replace the battery:
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
(IKT)
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot near
the key ring to remove the battery
cover.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on
the battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
Locks and Security
118
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Remove the old battery.
Note: Please refer to local
regulations when disposing of
transmitter batteries.
3. Insert the new battery. Refer to
the instructions inside the IKT for
the correct orientation of the
battery. Press the battery down to
ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity.
4. Snap the battery cover back onto the key.
Intelligent Access key (IA key)
1. Remove the backup key from the
transmitter, then twist a thin coin in
the slot hidden behind the backup
key slot to remove the battery
cover.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on
the battery terminals or on the back
surface of the circuit board.
2. Remove the old battery.
Note: Please refer to local
regulations when disposing of
transmitter batteries.
3. Insert the new battery. Refer to
the instructions inside the IA key
for the correct orientation of the
battery. Press the battery down to
ensure that the battery is fully
seated in the battery housing cavity.
4. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter and install the
backup key.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the IKT or IA key to
become deprogrammed from your vehicle. They should operate normally
after battery replacement.
Locks and Security
119
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Replacing lost Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs) or Intelligent
Access Keys (IA keys)
If you would like to have your IKTs or IA keys reprogrammed because
you lost one, or would like to buy additional transmitters you can either
reprogram them yourself, or take all transmitters to your authorized
dealer for reprogramming.
How to reprogram your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs) or
Intelligent Access Keys (IA keys)
To program a new IKTs or IA keys yourself, refer to SecuriLock威
passive anti-theft section of this chapter. Note: At least two already
programmed transmitters are required to perform this procedure
yourself.
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps, parking lamps and puddle lamps (if equipped)
illuminate when the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter or Intelligent Access
Keys or the keyless entry system keypad is used to unlock the door(s).
The illuminated entry system will turn off the lights if:
• the ignition is turned on, or
• the
control on the transmitter is pressed, or
• the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad, or
• the vehicle is locked using the key in the driver door cylinder, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
Illuminated exit
• When all vehicle doors are closed, the ignition is turned off and the
key is removed from the ignition (IKT only), the interior dome lamps,
parking lamps and the puddle lamps (if equipped) will illuminate.
The lamps will turn off if all the doors remain closed and
• 25 seconds elapse, or
• the key is inserted in the ignition (IKT only) or (if equipped with
Intelligent access with push button start feature) the start button is
pressed.
Locks and Security
120
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Battery saver
The battery saver will shut off the lamps 10 minutes after the ignition
has been turned off.
• If the dome lamps were turned on using the panel dimmer control, the
battery saver will shut them off 10 minutes after the ignition has been
turned off.
• If the courtesy lamps were turned on because one of the vehicle doors
or the trunk was opened, the battery saver will shut them off
10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
• The battery saver will shut off the headlamps 10 minutes after the
ignition has been turned off.
Accessory mode battery saver for Intelligent Access Keys with
Push Button Start (if equipped)
The battery saver will shut off the ignition approximately 45 minutes
after the vehicle is left in Accessory Mode, in order to preserve the
vehicle’s battery.
Locks and Security
121
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
The keypad, located near the driver’s window, is invisible until touched
and then it lights up so you can see and touch the appropriate buttons.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast on the keypad, the unlock
function may not work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly.
You can use the keyless entry
keypad to:
• lock or unlock the doors without
using a key.
• open the trunk.
• recall memory seat/power mirrors
and steering column positions (if
equipped).
• enable or disable the autolock
and autounlock features
• Activate Intelligent Access (if
equipped) at the driver door,
refer to Intelligent Access in this
chapter.
The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5–digit entry code; this
code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box and is
available from your authorized dealer. You can also create up to three of
your own 5–digit personal entry codes.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent Access feature,
your keypad will still function normally if you enter your personal entry
code or factory set code. However, if your transmitter is within range of
the driver’s door, an Intelligent Access unlock will also occur each time
you press any number on the keypad. Note that this additional unlock
will not impact keypad functionality, and you can still enter your code
and perform all keypad functions (unlock, lock, trunk release).
Programming a personal entry code and keypad association to
memory seats, mirrors and steering column (if equipped)
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory set code.
2. Within five seconds press the 1 • 2 on the keypad.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
Locks and Security
122
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. For memory recall feature, enter the sixth digit 1 • 2 to store driver 1
settings or 3 • 4 to store driver 2 settings.
Note: Touching 5 • 6, 7 • 8, or 9 • 0 keypad numbers as a sixth digit
will not recall a driver memory setting.
Note: The factory-set code cannot be associated with a memory setting.
5. The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that your personal entry
code has been programmed to the module.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
• The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal
code.
Erasing personal code
1. Enter the factory set 5–digit code.
2. Within five seconds, press the 1 • 2 on the keypad and release.
3. Press and hold the 1 • 2 for two seconds. This must be done within
five seconds of completing Step 2.
All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5–digit code
will work.
Anti-scan feature
If the wrong code has been entered seven times (35 consecutive button
presses), the keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode disables
the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity.
• pressing the
control on your transmitter.
• the ignition is turned on.
• the door is unlocked with a key
Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry
To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each
other. The interior lamps will illuminate. Note: If the two-stage unlocking
feature is disabled, all doors will unlock; for more information regarding
Locks and Security
123
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
two-stage unlocking, refer to the Central Unlocking/Two stage
unlocking section earlier in this chapter.
To unlock all doors, enter the factory set code or your personal code,
then press the 3 • 4 control within five seconds.
Note: If equipped with Intelligent Access, if the Intelligent Access Key is
within 3 feet (1 meter) of the driver door, your keyless entry keypad
code will still function the same way, but the driver’s door will also
unlock with each keypad button press.
To open the trunk, enter the factory set code or your personal code,
then press the 5 • 6 control within five seconds.
To lock all doors, press and hold the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 at the same
time (with the driver’s door closed) for two seconds will lock all doors.
You do not need to enter the keypad code first.
SECURILOCK姞 PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) or
Intelligent Access Keys programmed to your vehicle is used. The
use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
Your vehicle comes with two coded Integrated Keyhead Transmitters or
Intelligent Access Keys; additional coded transmitters may be purchased
from your authorized dealer. The authorized dealer can program your
spare transmitters to your vehicle or you can program then yourself.
Refer to Programming spare Integrated Keyhead Transmitters or
Programming Spare Intelligent Access Keys for instructions on how to
program the coded key.
For Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT), the Standard SecuriLock威
keys without remote entry transmitter functionality can also be
purchased from your authorized dealer if desired.
Note: The SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the
Locks and Security
124
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always
take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
Anti-theft indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument panel cluster.
• When the ignition is off, the
indicator will flash once every two
seconds to indicate the
SecuriLock威 system is functioning
as a theft deterrent.
• When the ignition is on, the indicator will glow for three seconds to
indicate normal system functionality (IKT equipped vehicles only).
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock威 system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the on position. If this
occurs, turn the ignition off then back to on to make sure there was no
electronic interference with the programmed key. If the vehicle doesn’t
start, try to start it with the 2nd programmed key and if successful
contact your authorized dealership for key replacement. If the indicator
still flashes rapidly or glows steadily, the vehicle will not start, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible for service (IKT equipped
vehicles only).
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately after turning the ignition off.
The theft indicator will flash every
two seconds to act as a theft
deterrent when the vehicle is
armed.
Automatic disarming
The vehicle is disarmed immediately after the ignition is turned on.
If equipped with IKTs, the theft indicator will illuminate for three
seconds and then go out. If the theft indicator stays on for an extended
period of time or flashes rapidly, contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Locks and Security
125
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Replacement Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKT) and coded
keys or Intelligent Access Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two Integrated Keyhead
Transmitters (IKTs) or two Intelligent Access Keys.
The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) functions as both a
programmed ignition key that operates all the locks and starts the
vehicle, as well as a remote keyless entry transmitter. A maximum of
eight coded keys can be programmed to your vehicle; only four of these
eight coded keys can be IKTs with remote entry functionality.
The Intelligent Access Key functions as both a programmed key that
operates the driver door lock, activates Intelligent Access with Push
Button Start systems as well as a remote keyless entry transmitter. A
maximum of four Intelligent Access Keys can be programmed to your
vehicle.
If your programmed transmitters or standard SecuriLock威 coded keys
(IKTs only) are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key, you
will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The key
codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need
to be programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
Programming spare Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys
If you have a Intelligent Access Keys, refer to Programming spare
intelligent access keys in this section.
You can program your own Integrated Keyhead Transmitters or standard
SecuriLock威 coded keys to your vehicle. This procedure will program
both the engine immobilizer keycode and the remote entry transmitter
portion of the IKT to your vehicle. Note: A maximum of eight coded
keys can be programmed to your vehicle; only four of these eight can be
IKTs with remote entry functionality.
Tips:
• Only use Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs) or standard
SecuriLock威 keys.
• You must have two previously programmed coded keys (keys that
already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed
key(s) readily accessible.
Locks and Security
126
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key(s)
programmed.
Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition.
2. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition off and remove the first coded key from the
ignition.
4. After three seconds but within ten seconds of turning the ignition off,
insert the second previously coded key into the ignition.
5. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the ignition off and remove the second previously programmed
coded key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 20 seconds of turning the ignition off
and removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the ignition.
8. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least six
seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition.
If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s
engine and will operate the remote entry system (if the new key is an
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter). The theft indicator light will illuminate
for three seconds and then go out to indicate successful programming.
If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start your
vehicle’s engine and/or will not operate the remote entry features. The
theft indicator light may flash on and off. Wait 20 seconds and you may
repeat Steps 1 through 8. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your
authorized dealer to have the new key(s) programmed.
To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), wait 20 seconds and
then repeat this procedure from Step 1.
Note: To program MyKey™ features, refer to MyKey™ in this chapter.
Programming spare Intelligent Access Keys (if equipped)
If you have Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKT) or standard
SecuriLock威 coded keys, refer to Programming spare integrated
keyhead transmitter (IKT) keys in this section.
Locks and Security
127
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
You must have two previously programmed Intelligent Access Keys inside
the vehicle and the new unprogrammed Intelligent Access Keys readily
accessible. If two previously programmed keys are not available, you
must take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare
key(s) programmed.
Note: A maximum of four Intelligent Access Keys can be programmed to
your vehicle. If you would like to replace a previously programmed
access key with a new access key, or if you already have four access keys
programmed to your vehicle, you must take your vehicle and all access
keys to your authorized dealer to be erased and reprogrammed.
Ensure that the vehicle is off before beginning this procedure. Ensure
that all doors are closed before beginning this procedure and that all
doors remain closed throughout the procedure. Perform this procedure
exactly as described below, and perform all steps within 30 seconds of
starting the sequence. If any steps are performed out of sequence, stop
and wait for at least one minute before starting again.
Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
1. Place the new unprogrammed Intelligent Access Key in the pocket
inside the glove box.
2. Press the driver or passenger power door unlock control three times.
3. Press and release the brake pedal one time.
4. Press the driver or passenger power door lock control three times.
5. Press and release the brake pedal one time. The indicator on the
Start/Stop button should begin to rapidly flash, indicating that
programming mode has been entered and two programmed Intelligent
Access Keys have been detected in the vehicle.
6. Within one minute, press the start/stop button. A message will be
displayed on the message center indicating that the new Intelligent
Access Key was programmed. If four Intelligent Access Keys have
already been programmed to your vehicle, you cannot program anymore
and the message MAX # OF KEYS LEARNED will be displayed on the
message center.
7. Remove from glove box pocket and press the
or control on the
newly programmed Intelligent Access Keys to exit programming mode.
8. Verify that the remote entry functions operate (lock, unlock) and that
the vehicle starts with new Intelligent Access Key.
If the Intelligent Access Key has been successfully programmed, it can
be used to activate the Intelligent Access with Push Button Start feature
and can be used to start your vehicle.
Locks and Security
128
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: To program MyKey™ features, refer to MyKey™ in this chapter.
MYKEY™
The MyKey™ feature allows you to program a restricted driving mode to
promote good driving habits. All but one of the keys programmed to the
vehicle can be activated as a MyKey™. The key will remain restricted
until MyKey™ is disabled. Any remaining keys are referred to as an
“Administrator key” or Admin key. The Admin key can be used to create
a MyKey™, program optional MyKey™ settings, and disable the
MyKey™ feature. When the MyKey™ feature is enabled the user can use
System Check in the message center to see how many MyKeys and
Admin keys are programmed to the vehicle, and how many total miles
have been driven with the MyKey™ active.
MyKey™ Restricted Features
Standard settings – These settings cannot be changed
• The audio system will be muted whenever Belt-Minder威 is activated
until the safety belts are buckled. Refer to the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter for a detailed description of Belt-Minder威
operation.
• Low fuel warnings are displayed in the message center followed by a
chime when the Distance to Empty value reaches 75 miles (120 km).
• The Reverse sensing system and Forward Collision Warning cannot be
turned off.
Optional settings – These settings can be changed
• Vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph (130 km/h). Visual warnings are
displayed followed by a chime when the vehicle speed has reached
80 mph (130 km/h).
• Visual warnings are displayed followed by a chime when a preselected
vehicle speed of 45, 55 or 65 mph (75, 90, or 105 km/h) is exceeded
• The maximum volume of the audio system is limited to 45%. MYKEY
VOLUME LIMITED will be displayed in the radio or (if equipped)
navigation screen when attempting to exceed the limited volume
• The AdvanceTrac威 system cannot be turned off. When this optional
setting is on, the MyKey™ user will not be able to deactivate the
system. Note: It may be beneficial to deactivate the AdvanceTrac威
system if the vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, or sand.
Locks and Security
129
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Create a MyKey™
To program MyKey™ on one of the keys programmed to the vehicle,
insert it into the ignition. (For vehicles equipped with push button start,
put the Intelligent Access Key in the backup slot; see the Driving
chapter for the location of the backup slot.) Turn the ignition on. Use
the message center buttons to do the following:
1. Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CREATE MYKEY is displayed.
2. Press and release the RESET button. HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM
MYKEY will be displayed.
3. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until MARK THIS
AS RESTRICTED is displayed.
4. Wait until KEY RESTRICTED AT NEXT START is displayed.
MyKey™ is successfully programmed. Make sure you label it so you can
distinguish it from the Admin keys. Note: To program the optional
settings go to step 2 in the Programming MyKey™ Optional Settings
section.
Note: The MyKey™ can be cleared within the same key cycle that it was
created, otherwise a standard key (Administrator key) is required to
disable the MyKey™ programming. To clear all MyKeys™ go to step 2 in
the Disable MyKey™ section.
Programming MyKey™ Optional Settings
Turn the ignition on using an Admin key. To program the optional
settings, use the message center buttons to do the following:
1. Press SETUP until RESET FOR MYKEY SETUP is displayed.
2. Press and release the RESET button to display MyKey™ setup menus.
The first menu shown is:
MYKEY MAX MPH <80 MPH> OFF
3. If you don’t want to change the maximum speed setting, press the
SETUP button to display the next menu. The remaining menus appear as
follows with the default settings shown:
MYKEY MPH TONES 45 55 65 <OFF>
MYKEY VOLUME LIMIT <ON> OFF
MYKEY ADVTRAC CTRL ON <OFF>.
4. On any of the menus press RESET to highlight your choice with the
<…>.
5. Press SETUP to enter your choice. The next optional setting will be
displayed.
Locks and Security
130
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you are done changing the optional
settings.
Disable MyKey™
To reset all MyKeys™ as Admin keys do the following:
1. Turn the vehicle on using the Admin key.
2. Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CLEAR MYKEY is displayed.
3. Press and release the RESET button. HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM
CLEAR is displayed.
4. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until ALL MYKEYS
CLEARED is displayed.
Check MyKey™ System Status
The vehicle System Check will provide the status of the following
MyKey™ parameters:
• MYKEY MILES — This odometer only tracks mileage when a MyKey™
is used. If mileage does not accumulate as expected, then the
MyKey™ is not being used by the intended user. The only way to
reset this odometer to zero is by disabling MyKey™. If this odometer
is lower than the last time you checked, then the MyKey™ system has
been recently cleared.
• # MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED — Indicates how many MyKeys™ are
programmed to the vehicle. Can be used to detect deletion of a
MyKey™.
• # ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED — Indicates how many Admin keys
are programmed to the vehicle. Can be used to detect if an additional
spare key has been programmed to the vehicle
Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for MyKey™
system warnings displays.
Locks and Security
131
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Troubleshooting
Condition Potential Causes
Can’t create a MyKey™ • Key in the ignition is already a
MyKey™
• Key in the ignition is the last
remaining Admin key (there always
has to be at least one Admin key)
• Intelligent Access Key (if equipped)
not in the backup slot (for vehicles
with push button start)
• SecuriLock威 Passive Anti-Theft
System is disabled or in unlimited
mode
Cannot program the MyKey™
optional settings
• Key in the ignition is a MyKey™
• No MyKeys™ are programmed to
the vehicle. Refer to Create a
MyKey™ section
Cannot disable MyKey™ • Key in the ignition is a MyKey™
• No MyKeys™ are programmed to
the vehicle. Refer to Create a
MyKey™ section
Lost the only Admin key • Purchase a new key from your
authorized dealer
Lost any key • Refer to Programming spare keys
section
No MyKey™ function with (if
equipped) Intelligent Access
Key with push button start
• An Admin Key is present at vehicle
start
• No MyKeys™ are programmed to
the vehicle. Refer to Create a
MyKey™ section
PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
The perimeter anti-theft system will help protect your vehicle from
unauthorized entry.
If there is any potential perimeter anti-theft problem with your vehicle,
ensure ALL Integrated Keyhead Transmitters or Intelligent Access
Keys are brought to the authorized dealer to aid in troubleshooting.
Locks and Security
132
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Arming the system
When armed, this system will respond if unauthorized entry is
attempted. When unauthorized entry occurs, the system will flash the
turn signal lamps and will sound the horn.
The system is ready to arm whenever the ignition is off. Any of the
following actions will prearm the alarm system:
• Press the
control on the transmitter.
When you press the lock control twice within three seconds on your
transmitter, the horn will chirp once to let you know that all doors, the
hood and the trunk are closed. If any of these are not closed, the horn
will chirp twice to warn you that a door, the hood or the trunk is still
open.
• Press the driver or passenger
power door lock control while the
door is open, then close the door.
• Press and hold the 7 • 8 and 9 •
0 controls on the keyless entry
pad at the same time to lock the
doors (driver’s door must be
closed).
• If equipped with Intelligent
Access Key, lock the door by
turning the key in the door key
cylinder.
There is a 20 second countdown
when any of the above actions occur
before the vehicle becomes armed.
Each door, the hood or the trunk is
armed individually, and if any are
open, they must be closed for that entry point to enter the 20 second
countdown.
The turn signal lamps will flash once when all doors, the hood or the
trunk are closed indicating the vehicle is locked and entering the
20 second countdown.
Locks and Security
133
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Disarming the system
You can disarm the system by any of the following actions:
• Unlock the doors by using your transmitter.
• Unlock the doors by using your keyless entry pad.
• Unlock the driver door or all doors using the Intelligent Access (if
equipped).
• If equipped with Intelligent Access Key, unlock the driver’s door with a
key. Turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle to make sure the
alarm disarms.
• Turn ignition on.
• Press the
control on the transmitter. This will only shut off the
horn and parking lamps when the alarm is sounding. The alarm system
will still be armed.
Pressing the power door unlock control within the 20 second prearmed
mode will return the vehicle to a disarmed state.
If equipped with Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT), if using a key in
the driver’s door to unlock the vehicle, a chime will sound and the
message center will display TO STOP ALARM START VEHICLE when
you open the door. You will have 12 seconds to disarm the alarm system
using any of the actions above, otherwise the alarm will trigger.
Triggering the anti-theft system
The armed system will be triggered if:
• Any door, the hood or the trunk is opened without using the door key,
keypad, Integrated Keyhead Transmitter or Intelligent Access Key.
• Turn the ignition on with an invalid SecuriLock威 key or IKT (if
equipped).
Locks and Security
134
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SEATING
WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to
slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to
reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop.
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original
position, pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or
collision.
Adjustable head restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard head restraints that are
vertically adjustable.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in
and/or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its
proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint
while the vehicle is in motion.
The adjustable head restraints
consist of :
• a trimmed energy absorbing foam
and structure (1),
• two steel stems (2),
• a guide sleeve adjust/release
button (3),
• and a guide sleeve unlock/remove
button (4).
Seating and Safety Restraints
135
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To adjust the head restraint, do the following:
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving/riding position.
2. Raise the head restraint by
pulling up on the head restraint.
3. Lower the head restraint by
pressing and holding the guide
sleeve adjust/release button and
pushing down on the head restraint.
Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the
head restraint to its full up position.
WARNING: The adjustable head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted
when the seat is occupied.
Seating and Safety Restraints
136
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To remove the adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Pull up the head restraint until it
reaches the highest adjustment
position.
2. Simultaneously press and hold
both the adjust/release button and
the unlock/remove button, then pull
up on the head restraint.
To reinstall the adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Insert the two stems into the
guide sleeve collars.
2. Push the head restraint down
until it locks.
Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the
head restraint to its full up position.
Seating and Safety Restraints
137
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, head restraints must be installed properly.
Adjusting the front power seat
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to
reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop.
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to
slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against your
seatback, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury: Do not
hang objects off seat back or stow objects in map pocket (if
equipped) when a child is in the front passenger seat. Do not place
objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and
the center console (if equipped). Check the “passenger airbag off” or
“pass airbag off” indicator lamp for proper airbag status. Refer to Front
passenger sensing system section for additional details. Failure to
follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat
sensing system.
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Seating and Safety Restraints
138
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Press the front portion to tilt the
seat.
Press the control to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.
Press the control to recline the
seatback forward or rearward.
Seating and Safety Restraints
139
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Using the power lumbar support
The lumbar control is located on the side of the seat cushion.
Press the front of the control to
adjust firmness.
Press the rear of the control to
adjust softness.
Press the top of the control to raise
the height of the lumbar support.
Press the bottom of the control to
lower the height of the lumbar
support.
Heated and cooled seats
Heated seats
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seats will only function when the engine is running.
Seating and Safety Restraints
140
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To operate the heated seats:
Press once to activate the high heat
setting (three indicator lights).
Continue pressing to scroll through
the other settings; medium heat
(two indicator lights), low heat (one
indicator light) or off.
If the engine falls below 350 RPMs while the heated seats are on, the
feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated.
Cooled seats
The cooled seats will only function when the engine is running.
To operate the cooled seats:
Press once to activate the high cool
setting (three indicator lights).
Continue pressing to scroll through
the other settings; medium cool
(two indicator lights), low cool (one
indicator light) or off.
If the engine falls below 350 RPMs while the cooled seats are on, the
feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated.
Climate controlled seats air filter replacement
The climate controlled seat system includes air filters that must be
replaced periodically. Refer to the scheduled maintenance information
for more information.
• There is a filter located under
each front seat.
• The filter can be accessed from the rear of the seat. Move the front
seat to full up to ease access.
A/C
Seating and Safety Restraints
141
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To remove an air filter:
1. Remove key from ignition.
2. Push up on the outside rigid edge
of the filter until the tabs are
released, then rotate the air filter
toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Remove filter.
To install a filter:
1. First, position the filter in it’s
housing making sure that the far
forward end is all the way up in the
housing.
2. Push in on the center of the
outside edge of the filter and rotate
up into the housing until it clips into
position.
Seating and Safety Restraints
142
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Memory seats/power mirrors/steering column
This system allows automatic
positioning of the driver seat, power
mirrors, and steering column to two
programmable positions.
The memory seat control is located
on the driver door.
• To program position 1, move the
driver seat, mirrors and steering
column to the desired position
using the associated controls.
Press and hold control button 1 for at least two seconds.
• To program position 2, repeat the previous procedure using control
button 2.
A position can be recalled:
• in any gearshift position if the ignition is not on.
• only in P (Park) or N (Neutral) if the ignition is on.
A memory seat position may be programmed at any time.
The memory positions are also recalled when you press your remote
entry transmitter
(unlock) control (if the transmitter is programmed
to a memory position) or, when you enter a valid personal entry code
that is programmed to a memory position.
To program the memory feature to a remote entry transmitter and for
more information on how to use the keypad, refer to Remote entry
system in the Locks and Security chapter.
Easy entry/exit feature
This feature automatically moves the steering wheel all the way up and
in and moves the driver’s seat rearward 2 in (5 cm) when:
• the transmission is in N (Neutral) or P (Park)
• the key is removed from the ignition cylinder or the push button start
system (if equipped) is switched off (refer to Push button start
system in the Driving chapter).
The seat and steering wheel will move to the original position when:
• the transmission is in N (Neutral) or P (Park)
• the key is placed in the ignition cylinder or when the push button
start system (if equipped) is put in accessory mode (refer to Push
button start system in the Driving chapter).
Seating and Safety Restraints
143
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The easy entry feature can be turned off or on through the vehicle
message center. Refer to Message center in the Driver controls chapter.
REAR SEATS
Second-row non-adjustable head restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with second row outboard head restraints that
are non-adjustable.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in
and/or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its
proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint
while the vehicle is in motion.
The non-adjustable head restraints
consist of:
• a trimmed energy absorbing foam
and structure (1),
• two steel stems (2),
• and two guide sleeve
unlock/remove buttons (3).
To remove the non-adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Simultaneously press and hold
both unlock/remove buttons, then
pull up on the head restraint.
Seating and Safety Restraints
144
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To reinstall the non-adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Insert the two stems into the
guide sleeve collars.
2. Push the head restraint down
until it locks.
WARNING: The non-adjustable head restraint is a safety device.
It should be installed whenever the seat is occupied.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, head restraints must be installed properly.
Seat-mounted cup holders and armrest storage compartment
Cup holders and a storage compartment are located in the rear seat
armrest. To access the cup holders, rotate armrest into use position. To
open the storage compartment, pull up on the latch.
WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects
can injure you in a collision.
Seating and Safety Restraints
145
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Armrest pass-through
Pull down the door located in back
of the armrest in order to store
cargo of a longer length such as skis
or lumber.
Note: Do not exceed 80 lb (36 kg) of weight on the pass-through door.
Rear heated seats
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Seating and Safety Restraints
146
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seat control is on the back of the front center console.
To operate the heated seats:
• Push the indicated side of the
control for maximum heat.
• Push again to deactivate.
• Push the indicated side of the
control for minimum heat.
• Push again to deactivate.
The heated seat module resets at every ignition on cycle. While the
ignition is on, activating the high or low heated seat switch enables
heating mode. When activated, they will turn off automatically when the
ignition is off.
The indicator light will illuminate when the heated seats have been
activated.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety System姞
The Personal Safety System威 provides an improved overall level of
frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help
further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating
the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of
occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.
Seating and Safety Restraints
147
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System威 consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only), and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system
• “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp
• Front crash severity sensor.
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, front passenger sensing system, and indicator lights.
How does the Personal Safety System姞 work?
The Personal Safety System威 can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the Restraints Control Module (RCM). During a crash, the
RCM activates the safety belt pretensioners and/or either one or both
stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System威 determined
the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags are designed
to activate only in frontal and near-frontal collisions (not rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts) unless the collision causes sufficient
longitudinal deceleration. The pretensioners are designed to activate in
frontal and near-frontal collisions, and in side collisions and rollovers.
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints
(SRS) section in this chapter.
Seating and Safety Restraints
148
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
allows your Personal Safety System威 to distinguish between different
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
dual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.
Driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System威 to
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.
Front passenger sensing system
For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this
force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close
to the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, this occurs
because they are initially sitting very close to the airbag. For other
occupants, this occurs when the occupant is not properly restrained by
safety belts or child safety seats and they move forward during pre-crash
braking. The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary
injuries is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained. Accident
statistics suggest that children are much safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the front.
WARNING: Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air
bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.
WARNING: Always transport children 12 years old and under in
the back seat and always properly use appropriate child
restraints.
The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the
passenger front airbag. The system is designed to help protect small
(child size) occupants from airbag deployments when they are
improperly seated or restrained in the front passenger seat contrary to
proper child-seating or restraint usage recommendations. Even with this
technology, parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly
Seating and Safety Restraints
149
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
restrain children in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the passenger
front airbag and seat-mounted side airbag when the passenger seat is
empty to prevent unnecessary replacement of airbag(s) after a collision.
Front safety belt usage sensors
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information
allows your Personal Safety System威 to tailor the airbag deployment and
safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.
Front safety belt pretensioners
The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body
during frontal collisions, and in side collisions and rollovers. This helps
increase the effectiveness of the safety belts. In frontal collisions, the
safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or, if the collision is of
sufficient severity, together with the front airbags.
Front safety belt energy management retractors
The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow
webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled
manner in response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps
reduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by
limiting the load on the occupant. Refer to Energy management
feature- front outboard section in this chapter.
Determining if the Personal Safety System姞 is operational
The Personal Safety System威 uses a warning light in the instrument
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster
chapter. Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System威 is not
required.
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, driver seat
position sensor, and front passenger sensing system. In addition, the
RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following.
• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
Seating and Safety Restraints
150
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal
Safety System威 serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Safety belt precautions
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
where they can be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
Seating and Safety Restraints
151
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant
women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
accident.
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, press the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
All restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts.
While you are fastened in the safety belt, the combination lap/shoulder
belt adjusts to your movement. However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or
if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the safety
belt will become locked and help reduce your forward movement.
Seating and Safety Restraints
152
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Energy management feature — front outboard
• This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management
feature at the front seats to help further reduce the risk of injury in
the event of a head-on collision.
• The energy management feature has a retractor assembly that is
designed to extend the safety belt webbing in a controlled manner.
This helps reduce the belt force acting on the user’s chest.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and replace if necessary the belt
and retractor assembly after an accident could increase the risk
of injury in a collision.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder
belts. All of the passenger combination lap and shoulder belts have two
types of locking modes described below:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Automatic locking mode
When to use the automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat (except a
booster) is installed in a passenger front or rear seating position with a
combination lap/shoulder safety belt. Children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever
possible. Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety seats for
children later in this chapter.
Seating and Safety Restraints
153
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
How to use the automatic locking mode
• Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
• Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire
belt is pulled out.
• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
WARNING: Ford Motor Company recommends that all
passenger safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware should
be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision to verify that
the ⬙automatic locking retractor⬙ feature for child seats is still working
properly. Safety belt assemblies should be inspected by an authorized
dealer and must be replaced if either damage or improper operation is
noted. Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Seating and Safety Restraints
154
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Safety belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has safety belt height
adjustments for the front outboard
seating positions.
Adjust the height of the shoulder
belt so the belt rests across the
middle of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
squeeze the button and slide the
height adjuster up or down. Release
the button and pull down on the
height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt
and increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Safety belt pretensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and
front outboard passenger seating positions.
The safety belt pretensioner tightens the safety belts firmly against the
occupant’s body at the start of the crash.
WARNING: The driver and front passenger safety belt system
(including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be
replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in
deployment of front airbags, seat-mounted side airbags and Safety
Canopy威, and safety belt pretensioners.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is an 8 inch
(20 cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
Seating and Safety Restraints
155
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the
shoulder belt across the torso.
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
Conditions of operation
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition is
on...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition is
on ...
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
Belt-Minder姞
The Belt-Minder威 feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning
light in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s
safety belt is unbuckled.
The Belt-Minder威 feature uses information from the front passenger
sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and
therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the
Belt-Minder威 feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,
warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined
by the front passenger sensing system.
Both the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt usages are monitored and
either may activate the Belt-Minder威 feature. The warnings are the same
for the driver and the front passenger. If the Belt-Minder威 warnings have
expired (warnings for approximately five minutes) for one occupant
(driver or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the
Belt-Minder威 feature.
Seating and Safety Restraints
156
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: If you are using MyKey™, the Belt-Minder威 warning will not
expire. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and security chapter.
If... Then...
The driver’s and front
passenger’s safety belts are
buckled before the ignition is
switched on or less than
1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition has been switched
on...
The Belt-Minder威 feature will not
activate.
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt is not
buckled when the vehicle has
reached at least 3 mph
(5 km/h) and 1-2 minutes have
elapsed since the ignition has
been switched on...
The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated
- the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for six seconds every
30 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until
the safety belts are buckled.
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt becomes
unbuckled for approximately
1 minute while the vehicle is
traveling at least 3 mph
(5 km/h) and more than
1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition has been switched
on...
The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated
- the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for six seconds every
30 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until
the safety belts are buckled.
Seating and Safety Restraints
157
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts
(All statistics based on U.S. data):
Reasons given... Consider...
“Crashes are rare events” 36700 crashes occur every day. The
more we drive, the more we are
exposed to “rare” events, even for
good drivers. 1in4ofuswillbe
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
“I’m not going far” 3of4fatal crashes occur within 25
miles (40 km) of home.
“Belts are uncomfortable” We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable -
try different positions for the safety
belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as
possible; this can improve comfort.
“I was in a hurry” Prime time for an accident.
Belt-Minder威 reminds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
“Safety belts don’t work” Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
“Traffic is light” Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
“Belts wrinkle my clothes” Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
“The people I’m with don’t
wear belts”
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
Seating and Safety Restraints
158
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Reasons given... Consider...
“I have an airbag” Airbags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
“I’d rather be thrown clear” Not a good idea. People who are
ejected are 40 times more likely
to DIE. Safety belts help prevent
ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR
CRASH”.
WARNING: Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a
latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt-Minder威 chime. To
do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s airbag
system.
Deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder姞 feature
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 are
deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating
one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will
terminate the process.
Read Steps1-5thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
Note: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 features must be
disabled/enabled separately. Both cannot be disable/enabled during the
same key cycle.
Note: If you are using MyKey™, the Belt-Minder威 cannot be disabled.
Also, if the Belt-Minder威 has been previously disabled, it will be
re-enabled during the use of MyKey™. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks
and Security chapter.
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 features can be
deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The gearshift is in P (Park).
• The ignition is off.
• The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled.
Seating and Safety Restraints
159
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your
Belt-Minder威, this system is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you
leave the Belt-Minder威 system activated for yourself and others who
may use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not
deactivate/activate the Belt-Minder威 feature while driving the vehicle.
1. Switch the ignition on. DO NOT START THE ENGINE.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (approximately one
minute).
3. Wait 10 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off.
• Step 4 must be completed within 20 seconds after the completion of
Step 3.
4. For the seating position being disabled buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt three times at a moderate speed, ending in the unbuckled
state.
• After Step 4, the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three
seconds.
5. Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt.
• This will disable the Belt-Minder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will
flash four times per second for three seconds.
• This will enable the Belt-Minder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will
flash four times per second for three seconds, followed by three
seconds with the light off, then followed by the safety belt warning
light flashing four times per second for three seconds again.
Seating and Safety Restraints
160
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
The airbag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is designed to work in
conjunction with the safety belts to help protect the driver and front
outboard passenger from certain upper body injuries. The term
“supplemental restraint” means the airbags are intended as a supplement
to the safety belts. Airbags alone cannot protect as well as airbags plus
safety belts in impacts for which the airbags are designed to deploy, and
airbags do not offer any protection in crashes for which they do not
deploy.
Important supplemental restraint system precautions
Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly or
gently and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is greatest close to
the trim covering the airbag module.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
Seating and Safety Restraints
161
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNING: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches
(25 cm) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
WARNING: Never place your arm over the airbag module as a
deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright
position.
WARNING: Do not put anything on or over the airbag module.
Placing objects on or over the airbag inflation area may cause
those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso
causing serious injury.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag supplemental restraint system (SRS) or its fuses. See your
authorized dealer.
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of
the vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure
and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the
vehicle.
Seating and Safety Restraints
162
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Children and airbags
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
WARNING: Airbags can kill
or injure a child in a child
seat. NEVER place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active
airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat all the
way back.
How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?
The airbag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
longitudinal deceleration sufficient
to cause the sensors to close an
electrical circuit that initiates airbag
inflation. The fact that the airbags
did not inflate in a collision does not
mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the
forces were not of the type
sufficient to cause activation. Front
airbags are designed to inflate in
frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or
rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal
deceleration.
Seating and Safety Restraints
163
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
airbag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes, but none
of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries, contact
with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling. Temporary
hearing loss is also a possibility as a result of the noise associated with a
deploying airbag. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with
considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as
fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to
occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely
important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the
airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control.
WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not
function again and must be replaced immediately. If the air
bag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
The SRS consists of:
• driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and
airbags).
• side airbags and Safety Canopy威. Refer to Seat-mounted side airbag
system and Safety Canopy威 system later in this chapter.
• one or more impact and safing sensors.
• driver and front passenger safety belt pretensioner
• a readiness light and tone.
Seating and Safety Restraints
164
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• diagnostic module.
• the electrical wiring which connects the components.
• Front passenger sensing system. Refer to Front passenger sensing
system later in this chapter.
• “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp. Refer to
Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter.
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the
supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the impact
sensors), the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the airbag
back up power and the airbag ignitors.
Front passenger sensing system
The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208
and is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger’s frontal
airbag under certain conditions.
The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of
the front passenger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed to
detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the
front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or
disabled (will not inflate).
The front passenger sensing system will disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in
the front seat,
• the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant
seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing
child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat,
• a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of
time,
• a child or a small person occupies the front passenger seat.
When the passenger airbag off light is illuminated, the passenger side
airbag may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries.
Seating and Safety Restraints
165
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The front passenger sensing system
uses a ⬙passenger airbag off⬙ or
⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator which will
illuminate and stay lit to remind you
that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled. The indicator lamp is
located on the instrument panel below the audio controls and above the
climate controls.
Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when
the ignition is on to confirm it is functional.
When the front passenger seat is not occupied (empty seat) or in the
event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate), the
indicator lamp will be unlit.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not
inflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant
seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected.
• When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate)
the front passenger frontal airbag, the indicator lamp will illuminate
and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is
disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not
lit, then switch the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the
vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
⬙passenger airbag off⬙ or ⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator lamp is lit, it is
possible that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Switch the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the
full upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.
Seating and Safety Restraints
166
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, the person should be
advised to ride in the rear seat.
Occupant
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Light
Passenger Airbag
Empty seat Unlit Disabled
Small child in child
safety seat or booster
Lit Disabled
Small child with safety
belt buckled or
unbuckled
Lit Disabled
Adult Unlit Enabled
WARNING: Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children
12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting
in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front
passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the
passenger airbag is disabled, the ⬙pass airbag off⬙ lamp may or may not
be illuminated according to the table below.
Seating and Safety Restraints
167
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Objects
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Light
Passenger Airbag
Small (i.e. three ring
binder, small purse,
bottled water)
Unlit Disabled
Medium (i.e. heavy
briefcase, fully packed
luggage)
Lit Disabled
Empty seat, or small
to medium object with
safety belt buckled
Lit Disabled
If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is
incorrect, check for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat
• Objects between the seat cushion and the center console (if
equipped)
• Objects hanging off the seat back
• Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket (if equipped)
• Objects placed on the occupant’s lap
• Cargo interference with the seat
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat
The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated
occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the passenger sensing system.
The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter due
to the conditions described in the list above.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury:
Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket (if equipped) or
hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat.
Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between
the seat and the center console (if equipped).
Check the “passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp for
proper airbag Status.
Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front
passenger seat sensing system.
Seating and Safety Restraints
168
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
In case there is a problem with the
front passenger sensing system, the
airbag readiness lamp in the
instrument cluster will stay lit.
If the airbag readiness lamp is lit, do the following:
The driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects that
may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering
with the seat.
If objects are lodged and/or cargo is interfering with the seat; please take
the following steps to remove the obstruction:
• Pull the vehicle over.
• Switch the vehicle off.
• Driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
• Restart the vehicle.
• Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness lamp is
no longer illuminated
• If the airbag readiness lamp remains illuminated, this may or may/not
be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system.
DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance chapter of this Owner’s Guide.
WARNING: Any alteration/modification to the front passenger
seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing
system.
Determining if the system is operational
The supplemental restraint system uses a warning indicator light in the
instrument cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the
system. Refer to the Warning lights and chimes section in the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not
required.
Seating and Safety Restraints
169
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light (same light
for front and side airbag system)
will either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after ignition is switched on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Seat-mounted side airbag system
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or
near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front
seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of
accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side
airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag
could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag SRS, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle should always wear
their safety belts even when an airbag SRS is provided.
Seating and Safety Restraints
170
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
How does the side airbag system work?
The design and development of the side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags.
The side airbag system consists of
the following:
• An inflatable nylon bag (airbag)
with a gas generator concealed
behind the outboard bolster of
the driver and front passenger
seatbacks.
• A special seat cover designed to
allow airbag deployment.
• The same warning light,
electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front airbags.
• Crash sensors located on the B and C pillars (one sensor on each
pillar on each side of the vehicle).
Side airbags, in combination with safety belts, can help reduce the risk of
severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision.
The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by
the collision will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact collisions.
The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral
deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit
that initiates airbag inflation.
The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that
something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were
not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side airbags are designed
to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or
near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral
deceleration.
WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
Seating and Safety Restraints
171
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: If the side
airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again.
The side airbag system
(including the seat) must be
inspected and serviced by an
authorized dealer. If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired
area will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
Safety Canopy姞 system
WARNING: Do not place
objects or mount equipment
on or near the headliner at the
siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying Safety
Canopy威. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk
of personal injury in the event of a
collision.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The Safety
Canopy威 could injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
Safety Canopy威 system, its fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or
the headliner on a vehicle containing a Safety Canopy威. See your
authorized dealer.
Seating and Safety Restraints
172
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle including the driver
should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS
and Safety Canopy威 system is provided.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place
objects in the deployment path of the inflatable Safety Canopy威.
How does the Safety Canopy姞 system work?
The design and development of the
Safety Canopy威 system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags (including the Safety
Canopy威).
The Safety Canopy威 system consists
of the following:
• An inflatable nylon curtain with a
gas generator concealed behind
the headliner and above the doors
(one on each side of vehicle).
• A headliner designed to flex open
above the side doors to allow Safety Canopy威 deployment.
• The same readiness airbag light, electronic control and diagnostic unit
as used for the front airbags.
• Two crash sensors mounted on the B pillar (one on each side of the
vehicle).
• Two crash sensors located at the C pillar behind the rear doors (one
on each side of the vehicle).
• Rollover sensor in the restraints control module (RCM).
Seating and Safety Restraints
173
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The Safety Canopy威 system, in combination with safety belts, can help
reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact
collision or rollover event.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in
the second row seats. The Safety Canopy威 will not interfere with
children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat
because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
The Safety Canopy威 system is designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the side crash sensor to
close an electrical circuit that initiates Safety Canopy威 inflation or when
a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor.
The Safety Canopy威 is mounted to roof side-rail sheet metal, behind the
headliner, above each row of seats. In certain lateral collisions or rollover
events, the Safety Canopy威 system will be activated, regardless of which
seats are occupied. The Safety Canopy威 is designed to inflate between
the side window area and occupants to further enhance protection
provided in side impact collisions and rollover events.
The fact that the Safety Canopy威 did not activate in a collision does not
mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the
forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. The Safety
Canopy威 is designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions or rollover
events, not in rear impact, frontal or near-frontal collisions, unless the
collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover likelihood.
WARNING: Several Safety Canopy威 system components get hot
after inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
Seating and Safety Restraints
174
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: If the Safety Canopy威 system has deployed, the
Safety Canopy威 will not function again unless replaced. The
Safety Canopy威 system (including the A, B, C, and D pillar trim and
headliner) must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If
the Safety Canopy威 is not replaced, it will not function again, which
will increase the risk of injury in a future collision.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness
section in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the
following:
• The readiness airbag light (same light as for front airbag system) will
either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
switched on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system
may not function properly in the event of a collision or rollover event.
SOS Post-Crash Alert System™
The SOS Post-Crash Alert automatically flashes the turn signal lamps and
sounds the horn three times at four second intervals in the event of a
serious impact that deploys an airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy威) or the safety belt pretensioners.
The SOS Post-Crash Alert can be turned off when any one of the
following actions are taken by the driver or any other person:
• pressing the hazard control button,
• or pressing the panic button on the remote entry transmitter.
The feature will continue to operate until the vehicle runs out of power.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles
For disposal of airbags or airbag equipped vehicles, see your authorized
dealer. Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel.
Seating and Safety Restraints
175
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
Important child restraint precautions
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in
a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight.
Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The
Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety
organizations or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford
recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) and your pediatrician to make sure your child seat
is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and properly
installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST
contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the internet at
http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. Failure to properly restrain children in safety
seats made especially for their height, age, and weight may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child size, height, weight, or age
Recommended
restraint type
Infants or
toddlers
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or
less (generally age four or younger)
Use a child
safety seat
(sometimes
called an infant
carrier,
convertible seat,
or toddler seat).
Seating and Safety Restraints
176
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child size, height, weight, or age
Recommended
restraint type
Small
children
Children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a child safety
seat (generally children who are less
than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, are greater than age four (4) and
less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 lbs (18 kg) and 80 lbs
(36 kg) and upward to 100 lbs
(45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer)
Use a
belt-positioning
booster seat.
Larger
children
Children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a
belt-positioning booster seat
(generally children who are at least
4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall or
greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by child
restraint manufacturer)
Use a vehicle
safety belt
having the lap
belt snug and
low across the
hips, shoulder
belt centered
across the
shoulder and
chest, and
seatback upright.
• You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the U.S. and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that small children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 ft 9 in
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of
age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.
Seating and Safety Restraints
177
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Restraint
Type
Child
Weight
Use any attachment method as indicated
below by “X”
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and
top
tether
anchor)
LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)
Safety
belt
and
top
tether
anchor
Safety
belt and
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
Safety
belt
only
Rear
facing
child seat
Up to
48 lb
(21 kg)
XX
Forward
facing
child seat
Up to
48 lb
(21 kg)
XXX
Forward
facing
child seat
Over
48 lb
(21 kg)
XX
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
vehicle seat all the way back. When possible, all children age 12 and
under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating
position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat.
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and
warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size,
height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child’s height, age, or weight or does not
properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death.
Seating and Safety Restraints
178
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision, which may result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.
They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or
death in a collision.
WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster
seat. These objects may become projectiles in a collision or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets
unattended in your vehicle.
Transporting children
Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their age, height and weight. All children are shaped
differently. The child height, age and weight thresholds provided are
recommendations or the minimum requirements of law. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) provides education and
training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in
the correct restraint system. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and your
pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and
CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the internet
at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov.
Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult
passengers in your vehicle.
Seating and Safety Restraints
179
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If the child is the proper height, age, and weight (as specified by your
child safety seat or booster manufacturer), fits the restraint and can be
restrained properly, then restrain the child in the child safety seat or
with the belt-positioning booster. Remember that child seats and
belt-positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of
different heights, ages and weights. Children who are too large for child
safety seats or belt-positioning boosters (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always properly wear safety belts.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Infant and/or toddler seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Airbag
supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
• Carefully follow all of the
manufacturer’s instructions
included with the safety seat you
put in your vehicle. If you do not
install and use the safety seat
properly, the child may be injured
in a sudden stop or collision.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing
child seat in the front seat, move the vehicle seat all the way back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
Seating and Safety Restraints
180
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap/shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap
and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to help prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place vehicle seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to step 5
below. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with
combination lap/shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
Seating and Safety Restraints
181
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
Seating and Safety Restraints
182
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it
retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6.
8. Remove remaining slack from the
belt. Force the seat down with extra
weight, e.g., by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in
order to force slack from the belt.
This is necessary to remove the
remaining slack that will exist once
the additional weight of the child is
added to the child restraint. It also
helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child seat to the
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
towards the buckle will additionally
help to remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). Refer to
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter.
Seating and Safety Restraints
183
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
10. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward and back. There should
be no more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) of
movement for proper installation.
11. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed.
Attaching child safety seats with LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) attachments
The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two (2)
lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet
(called the “seat bight”) and one (1) top tether anchor located behind
that seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH
equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment
method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat. For
forward-facing child seats, the top tether strap must also be attached to
the proper top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has been provided
with your child seat. Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a
child safety seat having a top tether strap. See Attaching child safety
seats with tether straps and Recommendations for attaching safety
restraints for children in this chapter for more information.
Seating and Safety Restraints
184
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the
seating positions marked with the child seat symbol.
The LATCH anchors are located at
the rear section of the rear seat
between the cushion and seatback,
below the locator symbols on the
seat back. Follow the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions to
properly install a child seat with
LATCH attachments.
Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps.
Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this
chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors
shown.
All the LATCH lower anchors are equally spaced, 280 mm (11 inches)
apart, so that a single LATCH child seat can be installed at any rear
seating position. If two child safety seats are installed using the
LATCH lower anchors, they must be placed in the outboard
seating positions only. If three child safety seats are installed,
you can install two using the LATCH lower anchors by placing
them in each outboard seating position and the third in the
center using the lap/shoulder belt, OR you can use the LATCH
lower anchors for the center child safety seat and the
lap/shoulder belts for the other two child safety seats in the
outboard positions. Use the tether anchors if applicable.
Seating and Safety Restraints
185
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Never attach two child safety seats to the same
anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold
two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious
injury or death.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, and have
attached the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor, do not
tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat
cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just
touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the
child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to
the vehicle. The seat should move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a crash greatly increases.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
Combining safety belt and LATCH lower anchors for attaching
child safety seats
When used in combination, either the safety belt or the LATCH lower
anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved.
Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat. Refer
to Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
in this chapter.
Seating and Safety Restraints
186
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring
point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your
child seat for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a
longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach
the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle.
The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap
anchors located behind the seats as described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle are located under a cover marked
with the tether anchor symbol (shown with title).
The tether strap anchors in your
vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown.
The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other
than the correct tether anchor.
Once the child safety seat has been installed, using either the safety belt,
the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top
tether strap.
Perform the following steps to attach a child safety seat to the tether
anchor:
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the head restraint.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
Seating and Safety Restraints
187
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. Open the tether anchor cover.
4. Clip the tether strap to the
anchor as shown.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety seat may
not be retained properly in the
event of a collision.
5. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the
child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends
its use.
Child booster seats
The belt-positioning booster (booster seat) is used to improve the fit of
the vehicle safety belt. Children outgrow a typical child seat (e.g.,
convertible or toddler seat) when they weigh about 40 lb (18 kg) and are
around four (4) years of age. Consult your child safety seat owner guide
for the weight, height, and age limits specific to your child safety seat.
Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child,
remains appropriate for their weight, height and age AND if properly
secured to the vehicle.
Seating and Safety Restraints
188
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Although the lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, children
who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap/shoulder
belts to fit properly, and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt
could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash. To improve the fit of
both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child
safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt-positioning
booster.
Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap/shoulder safety belts fit
better. They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips
and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion, while
minimizing slouching. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit
better and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of the
shoulder and across the center of the chest. Moving the child closer (a
few centimeters or inches) to the center of the vehicle, but remaining in
the same seating position, may help provide a good shoulder belt fit.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they reach a
height of at least 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall (around age eight to
age twelve and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) or upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions when seated without a booster seat:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Seating and Safety Restraints
189
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Types of booster seats
There are generally two types of belt-positioning booster seats: backless
and high back. Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle
lap/shoulder belt.
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield. If a vehicle seating position
has a low seat back or no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (as
measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this
case, move the backless booster
to another seating position with a
higher seat back or head restraint and lap/shoulder belts, or consider
using a high back booster seat.
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
Seating and Safety Restraints
190
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that
keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the
stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and
rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings below compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck
and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings below
also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child’s
hips.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster
seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is generally best to use a
booster seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat.
Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not
stay positioned on the shoulder during use.
Seating and Safety Restraints
191
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
Child restraint and safety belt maintenance
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically
to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the
vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears
or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety
seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be
inspected after a collision. Refer to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint. Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be
replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer
finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate
properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning
chapter.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the
safety belt assembly or child restraint system under the above
conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a
collision.
Seating and Safety Restraints
192
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, light truck or “LT” type tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as
defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1
1
⁄
2
) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
193
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Tires, Wheels and Loading
194
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a
digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
195
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or ⬙blowout⬙, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It
also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of
vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure and not appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
196
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see the Dissimilar spare
tire/wheel information section for description): Store and maintain at
60 psi (4.15 bar). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see the
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information section for description): Store
and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as
shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
TIRE CARE
Inspecting your tires and wheel valve stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts
that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace
the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and
other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be
repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show
signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
197
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
WARNING: Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
198
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire replacement requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found
on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these labels then you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If you
have questions regarding tire replacement, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
199
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions
listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure
indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft. (3.66 m) away from the tire wheel
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft. (3.66 m) away from the tire
wheel assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some
component of the TPMS may be damaged.
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
Tires, Wheels and Loading
200
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do
not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and
cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five
seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle) will
help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and
longer tire life.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
201
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
• Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four Wheel Drive
(4WD)/All Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
202
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
203
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M 81 mph (130 km/h)
N 87 mph (140 km/h)
Q 99 mph (159 km/h)
R 106 mph (171 km/h)
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
U 124 mph (200 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
W 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y 186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
204
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
1
⁄
2
) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
205
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
206
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades do
not apply to this type of tire.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general,
the larger the number, the wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
207
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
208
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge,
see Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain
your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Changing tires with TPMS
Each road tire is equipped with
a tire pressure sensor fastened
to the inside rim of the wheel.
The pressure sensor is covered
by the tire and is not visible
unless the tire is removed. The
pressure sensor is located
opposite (180 degrees) from the
valve stem. Care must be taken
when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked
periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to
Inflating your tires in this chapter.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
209
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four
road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The Low
Tire Pressure Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under
inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF,
your tire pressure still needs to be checked. Visit www.checkmytires.org
for additional information.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you
that the damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on
your vehicle.
To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System,
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS
in this section.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
210
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is
no longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the
following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System:
Low Tire
Pressure
Warning Light
Possible
cause
Customer Action Required
Solid Warning
Light
Tire(s)
under-inflated
1. Check your tire pressure to
ensure tires are properly inflated;
refer to Inflating your tires in
this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended
inflation pressure as shown on the
Tire Label (located on the edge of
driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the
vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph
(32 km/h) before the light will
turn OFF.
Spare tire in
use
Your temporary spare tire is in
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel/tire and reinstall it on the
vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description on
how the system functions, refer to
When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
TPMS
malfunction
If your tires are properly inflated
and your spare tire is not in use
and the light remains ON, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
211
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Low Tire
Pressure
Warning Light
Possible
cause
Customer Action Required
Flashing Warning
Light
Spare tire in
use
Your temporary spare tire is in
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel and re-mount it on the
vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description of
how the system functions under
these conditions, refer to When
your temporary spare tire is
installed in this section.
TPMS
malfunction
If your tires are properly inflated
and your spare tire is not in use
and the TPMS warning light still
flashes, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower
pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower
than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning
for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is ON, visually
check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more tires are flat,
repair as necessary.) Check air pressure in the road tires. If any tire is
under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where
air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
212
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
WARNING:
Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed
rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally, the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension,
axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• Use only SAE class “S” cables or equivalent on P235/55R18 tires on
the front tires only. SAE class “S” chains or other conventional link
chains may cause damage to the vehicles wheel house and/or body.
Use of optional spike spider type traction devices or equivalent is also
acceptable.
• Do not install tire chains, cables, or optional traction devices on the
rear tires. This could cause damage to the vehicle’s wheel house or
body.
• Do not use tire chains, cables, or optional traction devices with
optional P255/45R19 or 245/45R20 tires.
• Install tire cables securely, verifying that the tire cables do not touch
any wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the cables. If this does not work, remove
the cables to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Remove the tire cables when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire cables on dry roads.
• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when
using snow tires and chains.
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) with tire cables on your vehicle.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
213
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
214
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should
carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
Example only:
Tires, Wheels and Loading
215
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label located on the B-Pillar or the
edge of the driver’s door. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
216
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Example only:
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle
handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural
damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal
injury.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
217
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicles’ braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safe
control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing
vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle. The
GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult
your authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
provided by your authorized dealer) for more detailed
information.
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may
lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
218
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635–340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1,400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1,400 - 1,100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x
99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
• A final example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for
12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity
to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1,400 - (2 x 220) -
(12 x 100) = 1,400 - 440 - 1,200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have
enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 -
540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least
240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then
the load calculation would be:
Tires, Wheels and Loading
219
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
1,400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1,400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home.
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x
45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.
TRAILER TOWING
Your vehicle is capable of towing a trailer up to 1,000 lb. (454 kg) gross
trailer weight with a maximum tongue load of 100 lb. (45 kg). Do not
tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 500 miles
(800 km).
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these components
carefully after towing.
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the certification label.
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. Contact your authorized dealer or a
reliable trailer dealer as soon as possible if you require assistance.
Hitches
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle bumper. Use a load
carrying hitch. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that
10–15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
220
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not
have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision
greatly increase.
WARNING: Do not operate Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
when towing a trailer equipped with brakes. Aftermarket trailer
brakes will not function properly when ACC is activated, which may
lead to loss of vehicle control, increasing the risk of serious injury.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. Do not
connect trailer lamps directly to your vehicle’s tail lamps. This can cause
damage to your vehicle’s electrical system. Contact your authorized
dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for
hooking up trailer lamps.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
221
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• It is recommended to select the “M” gear position when additional
engine braking is needed. In situations such as prolonged downhill
driving on steep grades (i.e., driving in mountainous areas), additional
engine braking is needed to reduce the load on the vehicle’s regular
brake system to prevent them from overheating. For more information
on transmission operation and gear positions, see Understanding the
gearshift positions of the 6–speed automatic transmission in the
Driving chapter.
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for more information.
Trailer towing tips
• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
• If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift into the “M” gear
position. Do not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat
and become less effective. For more information on transmission
operation and gear positions, see Automatic transmission operation
in the Driving chapter.
• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park).
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Follow these guidelines for your specific powertrain combination to tow
your vehicle for personal travel (such as behind a motor home or a
truck).
Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to
prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle. Refer to the Climate
Controls chapter for more information.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
222
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
In case of roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, please refer to
Wrecker towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to your vehicle.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles:
Tow your Front Wheel Drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground
or with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly. If you are
using a tow dolly follow the instructions specified by the equipment
provider.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles:
Tow your All Wheel Drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or
with all four wheels off the ground using a vehicle transport trailer. Do
not tow your All Wheel Drive vehicle with the front wheels off
the ground (by using a tow dolly) and the rear wheels on the
ground. This will cause damage to your AWD system. If you are using a
vehicle transport trailer, follow the instruction specified by the
equipment provider.
Note: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, follow
these instructions:
• Tow only in the forward direction.
• Release the parking brake.
• Place the transmission shift lever in N (Neutral).
• Place the ignition in the accessory position (refer to Starting in the
Driving chapter).
• Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h)
• Start the engine and allow it to run for five minutes at the beginning
of each day and at each fuel stop.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
223
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
STARTING
Positions of the ignition (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with a push button start system, refer to
Push button start system in this section for ignition modes.
1. Off— locks the gearshift lever
and allows key removal. This
position also shuts the engine and
all electrical accessories off.
2. Accessory— allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not
running.
3. On— all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key
position when driving.
4. Start— cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Starting your vehicle
This system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
Don’t press the accelerator before or during starting. Only use the
accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine. For more
information on starting the vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this
chapter.
To avoid potential transmission damage at extremely cold temperatures
(below -20°F [-30°C]), it is recommended that the vehicle be warmed up
to normal operating temperature before driving at highway speeds above
50 mph (80 km/h). Normal operating temperature is normally reached
after 10 minutes of moderate driving or idling.
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Driving
224
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding against
exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs higher than normal in order
to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have the vehicle checked.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts. For
more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure vehicle accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is
set.
Driving
225
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Make sure the gearshift lever is in
P (Park).
3. Turn the key to 3 (on) without
turning the key to 4 (start).
If your vehicle is equipped with a
push button start system, refer to
Push button start system in this
section for ignition modes.
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information
regarding the warning lights.
Starting the engine
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a push button start system, refer
to Push button start system in this section for starting.
Driving
226
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
1. Turn the key to 3 (on) without
turning the key to 4 (start).
2. Turn the key to 4 (start), then
release the key as soon as the
engine begins cranking. Your vehicle
has a computer assisted cranking
system that assists in starting the
engine. After releasing the key from
the 4 (start) position, the engine may continue cranking for up to
10 seconds or until the vehicle starts.
Note: Cranking may be stopped at any time by turning the key to the off
position.
3. After idling for a few seconds, release the parking brake, apply the
brake, shift into gear and drive.
Note: If the engine does not start on the first try, turn the vehicle to the
off position, wait 10 seconds and try Step 2 again. If the engine still fails
to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try Step 2 again, keeping
the accelerator on the floor until the engine begins to accelerate above
cranking speeds; this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off
in case the engine is flooded with fuel.
Push button start system (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with the
push button start system, you can
start your vehicle by pressing the
start button in combination with the
brake pedal rather than using a key.
The start button is located on the
instrument panel to right of the
steering wheel.
In order to operate the push button
start system and start your vehicle,
your Intelligent Access key (IA key)
must be present inside the vehicle.
Ignition modes
1. Off — press and release the START/STOP button without applying the
brake pedal when your vehicle is in accessory or on modes or when the
engine is running. Note: When the vehicle is in motion, a single press
and release of the START/STOP button will not switch off the engine. In
order to switch off the engine while the vehicle is in motion, press and
hold the START/STOP button for at least one second.
Driving
227
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Accessory — press and release the START/STOP button without
applying the brake pedal. This allows electrical accessories such as the
radio to operate while the engine is not running. ACCESSORY POWER
ACTIVE and PRESS BRAKE TO START will be displayed in the message
center. Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for
more information.
3. On — press and hold the START/STOP button for at least one second
without applying the brake pedal. This will power your vehicle’s electrical
system and the warning lights in the instrument cluster will illuminate,
but the engine will remain off. Note: You cannot immediately start your
vehicle from the on mode. If you would like to start the vehicle and you
are in on mode, you must first switch the vehicle off.
4. Start — press the START/STOP button (for any length of time) while
applying the brake pedal. Note: The indicator light on the start button
will illuminate when the vehicle is in on mode and when the engine is
started.
There may be areas inside your vehicle where the IA key is not detected.
If the message NO KEY DETECTED appears on your message center
when you press the START/STOP button, it may be necessary to move
your IA key to another area within the vehicle. The IA key may not be
detected near the roof (between the driver or passenger sunvisor and
the roof, or in the overhead console area) or in the extreme corners of
the rear package tray, near your audio speakers. It is not recommended
that you stow the IA key in these locations. If you move the IA key to a
location where it has been detected before and you still see the NO KEY
DETECTED message, your IA key’s battery may be low or you may be in
an area with excessive radio frequency interference. If this occurs, you
can use the backup method to start your vehicle (see below).
Backup Method of Starting: Your
IA key uses a radio frequency signal
to communicate with your vehicle
and authorize your vehicle to start
when you press the START/STOP
button and apply the brake pedal. If
excessive radio frequency
interference is present in the area,
or if the battery in your IA key is
low, it may be necessary to start
your car by inserting the IA key in
the backup slot, located in your glove box. Insert the IA key into the slot
with buttons facing out and with key ring up. After inserting the IA key
Driving
228
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
into the backup slot, use the START/STOP button and brake pedal to
start your vehicle as usual. The vehicle should respond normally as long
as the IA key is in the backup slot in the glove box. Once the vehicle is
started, the IA key can be removed from the backup slot, if desired.
Fast Restart Feature: The Fast Restart feature allows you to re-start
your vehicle within 20 seconds of switching the vehicle off, if a valid IA
key is not present when the vehicle is switched off. When you switch
your vehicle off without a IA key in the passenger compartment or trunk,
the message RESTART NOW OR KEY IS NEEDED will be displayed on
the message center. You can re-start the vehicle (by applying the brake
pedal and pressing the START/STOP button) for up to 20 seconds, even
though the IA key is not present. After 20 seconds have expired, you can
no longer start your vehicle without the IA key present inside the
vehicle.
Switching the Vehicle Off when not in Park: It is recommended that
you shift into the Park position before switching your vehicle off. If you
switch your vehicle off with the shifter in any position other than Park,
the message SHIFT TO PARK will be displayed in the message center. If
the vehicle is left in this state, your key in ignition chime will activate
when the driver door is opened, and you may drain your vehicle’s
battery. In order to avoid draining your battery, it is recommended that
you always shift to park before or immediately after switching your
vehicle off.
Absence of the Intelligent Access key: Once the vehicle has started,
the vehicle will remain running until being turned off by the
START/STOP button, even if the IA key is no longer found in the vehicle.
Whenever a door is opened and then closed while the vehicle is running,
the system will search for a IA key inside the vehicle and the message
center will display NO KEY DETECTED if the IA key is no longer
present. This message is a reminder that someone else in the vehicle
may have taken the IA key when exiting the vehicle. If the IA key is no
longer present in the vehicle, you will not be able to re-start your vehicle
outside of the Fast Restart time (see Fast Restart Feature above). It is
important to be aware of where your IA key is located in the vehicle, to
avoid becoming stranded without a IA key.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
Driving
229
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
and allows the heater/defroster system to respond quickly. If your vehicle
is equipped with this system, your equipment includes a heater element
which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows
the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A/C electrical
source. The block heater system is most effective when outdoor
temperatures reach below 0°F (-18°C).
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions
could result in property damage or physical injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use
your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged
(cheater) adapters.
Prior to using the engine block heater, follow these recommendations for
proper and safe operation:
• For your safety, use an outdoor extension cord that is product
certified by Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). Use only an extension cord that can be used
outdoors, in cold temperatures, and is clearly marked ⬙Suitable for Use
with Outdoor Appliances.⬙ Never use an indoor extension cord
outdoors; it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard.
• Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord, minimum.
• Use as short an extension cord as possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords. Instead, use one extension cord
which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to
the outlet without stretching.
Driving
230
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition (not
patched or spliced). Store your extension cord indoors at
temperatures above 32°F (0°C). Outdoor conditions can deteriorate
extension cords over a period of time.
• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged (cheater) adapters.
Also ensure that the block heater, especially the cord, is in good
condition before use.
• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug /engine
block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order
to prevent possible shock or fire.
• Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of
all combustibles such as petroleum products, dust, rags, paper and
similar items.
• Be sure that the engine block heater, heater cord and extension cord
are solidly connected. A poor connection can cause the cord to
become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire. Be sure
to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system
has been operating for approximately a half hour.
• Finally, have the engine block heater system checked during your fall
tune-up to be sure it’s in good working order.
How to use the engine block heater
Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. To clean
them, use a dry cloth.
Depending on the type of factory installed equipment, your engine block
heater will use .4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. Your
factory installed block heater system does not have a thermostat;
however, maximum temperature is attained after approximately three
hours of operation. Block heater operation longer than three hours will
not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use additional
electricity.
Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the
vehicle. While not in use, make sure the protective cover seals the
prongs of the engine block heater cord plug.
Driving
231
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Refer to Brake system warning
light in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake
system warning light.
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). This
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and
brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the
brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is
done and normal brake operation resumes. These are normal
characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern.
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However,
the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
Brake Assist
The Brake Assist system provides full braking force during panic braking
situations. It detects a rapid application of the brake pedal and uses the
ABS system to achieve maximum braking pressure. Once a panic brake
application is detected, the system will remain activated as long as the
brake pedal is pressed or ABS is engaged. The system is deactivated by
either releasing the brake pedal or coming to a complete stop. When the
system activates, noise from the ABS pump motor and brake pedal
pulsation may be observed; this is normal.
P!
BRAKE
Driving
232
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
when the ignition is switched on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS is disabled due to a malfunction and needs to be serviced.
Even when the ABS is disabled,
normal braking is still effective. If
your BRAKE warning lamp
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately.
Parking brake
Apply the parking brake whenever
the vehicle is parked. To set the
parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down until the pedal
stops.
The BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster illuminates and
remains illuminated (when the
ignition is turned on) until the
parking brake is released.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park).
The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.
ABS
P!
BRAKE
P!
BRAKE
Driving
233
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Press the parking brake pedal
downward again to release the
parking brake. Driving with the
parking brake on will cause the
brakes to wear out quickly and
reduce fuel economy.
Note: If the vehicle is driven with
the parking brake applied, a chime
will sound.
ADVANCETRAC姞 STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM
WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system,
aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction and/or wheel/tire size may change the handling
characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance
of the AdvanceTrac威 system. In addition, installing any stereo
loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac威
system. Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible
from the front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order
to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac威 sensors.
Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac威 system could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot
defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a
vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your
vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the AdvanceTrac威 system is an indication that at least
some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this
could reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle potentially
resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death. If your AdvanceTrac威 system activates, SLOW DOWN.
Driving
234
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: If a failure has been detected within the
AdvanceTrac威 system, the ⬙sliding car⬙ icon
will illuminate
steadily, and you may hear a chime. If equipped with a message center,
the vehicle will also indicate a failure with the Brake system, have the
system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Your vehicle is equipped with the AdvanceTrac威 system. The
AdvanceTrac威 system provides the following stability enhancement
features for certain driving situations:
• Traction Control (TCS), which functions to help avoid drive-wheel
spin and loss of traction.
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC), which functions to help avoid skids
or lateral slides
The AdvanceTrac威 system automatically enables each time the engine is
started. All features of the AdvanceTrac威 system (TCS and ESC) are
active and monitor the vehicle from start-up. However, the system will
only intervene if the driving situation requires it.
The AdvanceTrac威 system includes
an AdvanceTrac威 “OFF” control
switch on the center of the
instrument panel, a “sliding car”
icon
and a “sliding car off”
icon
in the instrument cluster.
Both the “sliding car” icon
and the “sliding car off” icon in the
instrument cluster will illuminate temporarily during start-up as part of a
normal system self-check. The “sliding car” icon
may illuminate
(flash) during certain driving situation which cause the AdvanceTrac威
system to operate. If the “sliding car” icon
illuminates steadily, have
the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. If equipped
with a message center, the vehicle will also indicate a failure with the
brake system.
Note: If the system cannot be turned off, refer to MyKey™ in the Locks
and Security chapter for more information.
When AdvanceTrac威 performs a normal system self-check, some drivers
may notice a slight movement of the brake, and/or a rumble, grunting, or
grinding noise after startup and when driving off.
Driving
235
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When an event occurs that activates AdvanceTrac威 you may experience
the following:
• A slight deceleration of the vehicle
• The “sliding car”
indicator light will flash.
• If your foot is on the brake pedal, a vibration in the pedal
• If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the
brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces. You
may also hear a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during
this severe condition.
• The brake pedal may feel stiffer than usual.
Traction Control (TCS)
Traction Control is a driver aid feature that helps your vehicle maintain
traction of the wheels, typically when driving on slippery and/or hilly
road surfaces, by detecting and controlling wheel spin.
Excessive wheel spin is controlled in two ways, which may work
separately or in tandem, Engine Traction Control and Brake Traction
Control. Engine Traction Control works to limit drive-wheel spin by
momentarily reducing engine power. Brake Traction Control works to
limit wheel spin by momentarily applying the brakes to the wheel that is
slipping. Traction Control is most active at low speeds.
During Traction Control events the “sliding car” icon
in the
instrument cluster will flash.
If the Traction Control system is activated excessively in a short period
of time, the braking portion of the system may become temporarily
disabled to allow the brakes to cool down. In this situation, Traction
Control will use only engine power reduction or transfer to help control
the wheels from over-spinning. When the brakes have cooled down, the
system will regain all features. Anti-lock braking and ESC will continue
to function during the cool-down period.
The Engine Traction Control and Brake Traction Control system may be
deactivated in certain situations. See the Switching Off AdvanceTrac威
section below.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) may enhance your vehicle’s directional
stability during adverse maneuvers, for example when cornering severely
or avoiding objects in the roadway. ESC operates by applying brakes to
one or more of the wheels individually and, if necessary, reducing engine
power if the system detects that the vehicle is about to skid or slide
laterally.
Driving
236
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
During Electronic Stability Control events the “sliding car” icon in the
instrument cluster will flash.
Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the Electronic Stability
Control system, which include but are not limited to:
• Taking a turn too fast
• Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
• Driving over a patch of ice or other slippery surfaces
• Changing lanes on a snow-rutted road
• Entering a snow-free road from a snow-covered side street, or vice
versa
• Entering a paved road from a gravel road, or vice versa
• Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer (refer to Trailer
towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter).
Switching Off AdvanceTrac威
If the vehicle is stuck in snow, mud or sand, and seems to lose engine
power, switching off certain features of the AdvanceTrac威 system may be
beneficial because the wheels are allowed to spin. This will restore full
engine power and will enhance momentum through the obstacle.
To switch off the AdvanceTrac威
system press the AdvanceTrac威
⬙Off⬙ control switch. Full features of
the AdvanceTrac威 system can be
restored by pressing the
AdvanceTrac威⬙Off⬙ control switch
again or by turning off and restarting the engine.
If you switch off the AdvanceTrac威
system, the “sliding car off”
icon
will illuminate steadily.
Pressing the AdvanceTrac威⬙Off⬙
control switch again will turn off the
“sliding car off” icon.
In R (Reverse), ABS and the Engine and Brake Traction Control features
will continue to function; however, ESC is disabled.
OFF
Driving
237
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AdvanceTrac威 Features
Control
switch
functions
Mode
“Sliding
car off”
icon
Message
Center Display
(if equipped)
ESC
Traction
Control
Default at
start-up
System
Initialization
Turns on
during
bulb
check
Nothing
Displayed
Enabled Enabled
Control
switch
pressed
once
momentarily
Traction
Control OFF
On
TRACTION
CONTROL OFF
Enabled Disabled
Control
switch
pressed
again after
deactivation
AdvanceTrac威
fully enabled
Off
ADVANCETRAC
ON
Enabled Enabled
STEERING
3.5L EcoBoost engine (if equipped): Your vehicle is equipped with an
Electric Power Steering (EPS) system. There is no fluid reservoir to
check or fill.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving (or if the
ignition is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes
more effort. Extreme continuous steering may increase the effort it takes
for you to steer. This occurs to prevent internal overheating and
permanent damage to your steering system. If this should occur, you will
neither lose the ability to steer the vehicle manually nor will it cause
permanent damage. Typical steering and driving maneuvers will allow the
system to cool and steering assist will return to normal.
The EPS system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the
EPS system to ensure proper operation. When a system error is
detected, the following message SERVICE POWER STEERING, SERVICE
POWER STEERING NOW or POWER STEERING ASSIST FAULT may
display in the message center, refer to the Message center in the
Instrument Cluster chapter for more information.
Driving
238
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: The EPS system has diagnostics checks that
continuously monitor the EPS system to ensure proper operation
of the electronic system. When an electronic error is detected, the
message POWER STEERING ASSIST FAULT will be displayed in the
message center. If this happens, stop the vehicle in a safe place, and
turn off the engine. After at least 10 seconds, reset the system by
restarting the engine, and watch the message center for POWER
STEERING ASSIST FAULT. If the message returns, or returns while
driving, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked. With the
message displayed, the steering assist is turned off, making the vehicle
harder to steer.
WARNING: If the message SERVICE POWER STEERING is
displayed in the message center, the EPS system has detected a
problem with the system function. On the next key cycle the message
SERVICE POWER STEERING NOW will be displayed and steering
assist will be removed until the steering system is serviced. Have your
vehicle taken to the nearest dealer as soon as possible.
3.7L V6 Duratec engine: Your vehicle is equipped with a hydraulic
steering system.
To help prevent damage to the power steering system, never hold the
steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it stops) for more than
a few seconds when the engine is running. If the power steering system
breaks down (or if the engine is turned off), you can steer the vehicle
manually, but it takes more effort.
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level
(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
• Some noise is normal during operation. If excessive, check for low
power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your
authorized dealer.
• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering
pump fluid level. Check for low power steering pump fluid level before
seeking service by your authorized dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on
the reservoir, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.
If the steering wanders or pulls equipped with either EPS or hydraulic
steering system, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
Driving
239
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper vehicle alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
BRAKE-SHIFT INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the on position unless the brake pedal is applied. If you cannot move
the gearshift lever out of P (Park) when the ignition is on and the brake
pedal applied, it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brake
lamps are not operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the
Roadside Emergencies chapter.
If the fuse is not blown and the brakelamps are working properly, you
will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brakelamps are working.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Switch the ignition to off,
and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 6–speed automatic
transmission
Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing
fuel usage while coasting or decelerating. When you take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down the torque
converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the
engine while decelerating. This fuel economy benefit may be perceived
as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from
the accelerator pedal.
Driving
240
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission
and prevents the front wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Press the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and
securely latch it in P (Park)
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Switch the ignition off and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive)
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through six.
Driving
241
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
M (Manual)
With the gearshift lever in M
(manual), the driver can change
gears up or down as desired. This is
called SelectShift Automatic™
transmission (SST) mode. By
moving the gearshift lever from
drive position D (Drive) to M
(Manual) you now have control of
selecting the gear you desire using
the paddle shifters on the steering
wheel.
To return to normal ⬙D⬙ position,
move the shift lever back from ⬙M⬙
to ⬙D⬙. The transmission will operate
in gears one through six.
Understanding your SelectShift Automatic™ transmission (SST)
This vehicle is equipped with a
SelectShift Automatic™
transmission (SST) gearshift lever.
SST is an automatic transmission
with the ability for the driver to
change gears up or down (without a
clutch) as desired. By moving the
gearshift lever from drive position D
(Drive) to M (Manual) you now
have control of selecting the gear
you desire using the paddle shifters
on the steering wheel.
Driving
242
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Paddle shifters
The paddle shifters allow you to shift gears quickly, without taking your
hands off the steering wheel.
1. To manually downshift the
transmission with the gearshift lever
in M (Manual), press the paddle
shifters forward.
2. To manually upshift the
transmission with the gearshift lever
in M (Manual), press the paddle
shifters rearward.
Recommended shift speeds
Upshift according to the following chart:
Upshifts when accelerating
(recommended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
1 - 2 15 mph (24 km/h)
2 - 3 25 mph (40 km/h)
3 - 4 40 mph (64 km/h)
4 - 5 45 mph (72 km/h)
5 - 6 50 mph (80 km/h)
The instrument cluster will show the
current selected gear you are in.
In order to prevent the engine from
running at too low an RPM, which
may cause it to stall, the SST will
automatically make some downshifts
even if it has determined that you
have not downshifted in time.
Although the SST will make some
downshifts for you, it will still allow
you to downshift at any time as long
as the SST determines that the engine will not be damaged from
over-revving.
Engine damage may occur if excessive engine revving is held
without shifting.
Driving
243
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FORWARD (IF EQUIPPED) AND REVERSE SENSING SYSTEMS
The forward and reverse sensing system will warn the driver of obstacles
within a certain range of the front and rear bumpers.
The front sensors will be active
when the gearshift is in any position
other than P (Park) or N (Neutral)
and the vehicle speed is below
8 mph (13 km/h). The rear sensors
will only be active when the
gearshift is in R (Reverse).
The front sensors cover an area up
to 27.6 inches (70 cm) from the
front of the vehicle and about 6–9 in
(15–23 cm) to the side of the front
end of the vehicle. See the
illustration for approximate sensor
area coverage.
Driving
244
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The reverse sensing portion of the
system detects obstacles up to 6 ft.
(2 m) from the rear bumper with a
decreased coverage area at the
outer corners of the bumper, (refer
to the illustration for approximate
zone coverage areas). As you move
closer to the obstacle, the rate of
the tone increases. When the
obstacle is less than 10 inches
(25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound
continuously. If the system detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the
side of the vehicle, the tone will
sound for only three seconds. Once
the system detects an object
approaching, the tone will sound
again.
While receiving a rear detection warning, the radio volume will be
reduced to a predetermined level. After the warning goes away, the radio
will return to the previous value.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, please read and
understand the limitations of the forward and reverse sensing
system as contained in this section. Sensing is only an aid for some
(generally large and fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat
surface at “parking speeds”. Traffic control systems, inclement weather,
air brakes, and external motors and fans may also affect the function of
the sensing system; this may include reduced performance or a false
activation.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution
when in R (Reverse) and when using the sensing system.
Driving
245
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: This system is not designed to prevent contact with
small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a
warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to
avoid damaging the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller
objects, particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches,
bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the
normal detection zone of the forward and reverse sensing system may
create false beeps.
The system will sound a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near either
bumper in the following manner:
• The front sensors will sound a high pitched tone which will appear to
come from the dashboard
• The rear sensors will sound a lower pitched tone which will appear to
come from the rear interior of the vehicle
• The sensing system will report the obstacle which is closest to the
front or rear of the vehicle. For example, if an obstacle is 12 inches
(30 cm) from the front of the vehicle and, at the same time, an
obstacle is only six inches (15 cm) from the rear of the vehicle, the
lower pitched tone will sound.
The reverse sensing portion of the system will assist the driver in
detecting certain objects while:
• the vehicle is in R (Reverse) and moving toward a stationary object at
a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
• the vehicle is in R (Reverse) but not moving, and a moving object is
approaching the front or rear of the vehicle at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• the vehicle is in R (Reverse) and moving at a speed of less than
3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving object is approaching the rear of the
vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
The system is automatically enabled when the gearshift lever is placed in
D (Drive) or R (Reverse) and the ignition is on. A control in the message
center allows the driver to disable the forward (if equipped) and/or
reverse system. Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for more information. The message center will indicate a failure
in the forward or reverse system and will not allow the driver to switch
the faulted system on.
Driving
246
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: If the system cannot be turned off, refer to MyKey™ in the Locks
and Security chapter for more information.
The system defaults to enabled every time the ignition is switched on.
Press the control to disable or enable the system
Keep the sensors (located on the front and rear bumper/fascia)
free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean
the sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will
affect the accuracy of the sensing system.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the front or rear
bumper/fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may
be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false
alarms.
REARVIEW CAMERA SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The rearview camera system,
located on the trunk just above the
license plate, provides a video image
which appears on the navigation
screen of the area behind the
vehicle. It adds assistance to the
driver while reversing or reverse
parking the vehicle.
To use the camera system, place the transmission in R (Reverse); an
image will display on the navigation system screen. The area displayed
on the screen may vary according to the vehicle orientation and/or road
condition.
• (1) Rear bumper
• (2) Red zone
• (3) Yellow zone
• (4) Green zone
Always use caution while backing.
Objects in the red zone are closest
to your vehicle and objects in the
green zone are further away. Objects
are getting closer to your vehicle as
they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones.
Driving
247
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Use the side mirrors and rearview mirror to get better coverage on both
sides and rear of the vehicle.
After shifting out of R (Reverse) and into any gear other than P (Park),
the image will remain until the vehicle speed reaches five mph (8 km/h),
only if the rear camera delay feature is on, or until any navigation radio
button is pressed.
Note: The default setting for the rear camera delay is off. Press the
“Settings” button found on the navigation screen to set the rear camera
delay feature to on or off.
The camera lens for the camera is located on the trunk, above the
license plate. Keep the lens clean so that the video image remains clear
and undistorted. Clean the lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and
non-abrasive cleaner.
Note: If the camera system image is not clear or seems distorted, it may
be covered with water droplets, snow, mud or any other substance. If
this occurs, clean the camera lens before using the camera system.
WARNING: The camera system is a reverse aid supplement
device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with
the rearview mirror and the side mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the
bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera system.
WARNING: Backup as slow as possible since higher speeds
might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle.
WARNING: Do not use the camera system with the trunk open.
If the back end of the vehicle is hit or damaged, then check with your
authorized dealer to have your rear video system checked for proper
coverage and operation.
Driving
248
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Night time and dark area use
At night time or in dark areas, the camera system relies on the reverse
lamp lighting to produce an image. Therefore it is necessary that both
reverse lamps are operating in order to get a clear image in the dark. If
either of the lamps are not operating, stop using the camera system, at
least in the dark, until the lamp(s) are replaced and functioning.
Servicing
• If the image comes on while the vehicle is not in R (Reverse), have
the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
• If the image is not clear, then check if there is anything covering the
lens such as dirt, mud, ice, snow, etc. If the image is still not clear
after cleaning, have your system inspected by your authorized dealer.
COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The Collision Warning with Brake Support, is designed to alert the driver
of certain collision risks with a red warning light located above the
dashboard and an audible warning chime. The brake support helps
assists the driver in reducing the collision speed, by pre-charging the
brakes.
WARNING: This system is designed to be a supplementary
driving aid. It is not intended to replace the driver’s attention,
and judgement, or the need to apply the brakes. This system does NOT
activate the brakes automatically. Failure to press the brake pedal to
activate the brakes may result in a collision.
WARNING: The Collision Warning System with Brake Support
cannot help prevent all collisions. Do not rely on this system to
replace driver judgment and the need to maintain distance and speed.
Note: The Collision Warning with Brake Support will not detect, warn, or
respond to potential collisions with vehicles to the rear or sides of the
vehicle.
Driving
249
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Operation
The radar sensor detects vehicles
ahead that are moving in the same
direction as your vehicle.
If the radar detects that your
vehicle is rapidly closing on another
vehicle a red warning light will
illuminate and an audible warning
chime will sound.
After that, if the risk of collision
further increases after the warning
light, the brake support prepares
the brake system for rapid braking.
This may be perceptible to the
driver. However, the system will not
automatically activate the brakes.
The vehicle will not stop unless the driver presses the brake pedal. If the
brake pedal is pressed then braking is implemented with full brake
function, even if the force on the brake pedal is light.
The collision warning system is active at speeds above approximately
5 mph (8 km/h).
Collision Warning System Limitations
Due to the nature of radar technology, there may be certain instances
where vehicles will not provide a collision warning. These include:
• Stationary or slow moving vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
• Severe weather conditions (see also blocked sensor section).
• Debris build up on the grille near the headlamps (see block sensor
section).
• Small distance to vehicle ahead.
• Steering wheel and pedal movements are large (very active driving
style).
• High interior temperatures, which may deactivate the illumination or
the warning lamps until the interior temperature reduces (audible
warning will alert the driver).
In addition, sun load and sunglasses may reduce the visibility of the
warning lamps. Therefore, it is recommended to keep the audible
warning on.
Driving
250
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: The collision warning system’s brake support can
only help reduce the speed at which a collision occurs if the
driver applies the vehicle’s brakes. The brake pedal must be pressed
just like for any typical braking situation.
Blocked sensor
If a message regarding a blocked
sensor is displayed, the radar signals
from the sensor, located behind a
fascia cover near the driver side of
the lower grille, have been
obstructed. When the radar signals
are obstructed, a vehicle ahead
cannot be detected and the Collision
Warning system will not function.
The following table lists possible causes and actions for this message
being displayed.
Cause Action
The surface of the radar in the
grille is dirty or obstructed in
some way
Clean the grille surface in front of
the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction
The surface of the radar in the
grille is clean but the message
remains in the display
Wait a short time. It may take
several minutes for the radar to
detect that it is no longer
obstructed
Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is
interfering with the radar signals
Do not use the Collision Warning
System in these conditions
because it may not detect, warn,
or respond to potential collisions
Swirling water, or snow or ice on
the surface of the road may
interfere with the radar signals
Do not use the Collision Warning
System in these conditions
because it may not detect, warn,
or respond to potential collisions
Activating/deactivating collision warning system
To turn the warning system and/or chime on or off and set the warning
sensitivity <– –>, refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
Driving
251
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: If the system cannot be turned off in a MyKey™ equipped vehicle,
refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for more
information.
Note: If collision warnings are perceived as being too frequent or
disturbing then the warning sensitivity can be reduced, though the
manufacturer recommends using the highest sensitivity setting where
possible. Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer and later system
warnings. Refer to the Message center in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for instructions on reducing the sensitivity.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (APA) (IF EQUIPPED)
Active Park Assist (APA) will detect an available parallel parking space
and automatically steer the vehicle into the space (hands free) while you
control the accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The system will visually
and/or audibly instruct the driver to park the vehicle.
WARNING: This system is designed to be a supplementary park
aid. It is not intended to replace the driver’s attention and
judgment. The driver is responsible for avoiding hazards and
maintaining a safe distance and speed, even when the APA is in use.
Automatic Search for Parking Space
To start, press the APA control
switch (on the center console). The
message center will display ACTIVE
PARK SEARCHING. To designate
what side of the street to search on,
use the turn signal. The arrow
symbols >> and << in the message
center indicate on which side of the
vehicle APA will park. (If the turn
signal is not on, the system will
automatically search the passenger
side.)
Driving
252
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
For best performance, the driver should drive the vehicle as parallel as
possible while passing a parking space. If driven too fast (above 18 mph
[30 km/h]) for the system to measure parking spaces, the message center
will display ACTIVE PARK REDUCE SPEED.
When the system has found a space, the message center will display
SPACE FOUND PULL FORWARD followed by a chime. Drive forward
until the message center displays SPACE FOUND STOP followed by a
chime. When you stop the vehicle in position to begin parking, the
message center displays REMOVE HANDS PUT IN REVERSE.
Automatic Steering into Parking Space
Automatic steering is activated when you stop the vehicle, remove your
hands from the steering wheel and select the R (Reverse) gear. Be sure
the steering wheel motion is not obstructed by any objects. The vehicle
will steer itself from this point on as you follow the instructions in the
message center to safely move the vehicle reverse and forward in the
space. You may cancel APA at anytime by grabbing the steering wheel or
by pressing the APA control switch. When the vehicle is in R (Reverse)
the message center displays BACK UP USE CAUTION.
Driving
253
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you determine the vehicle is back far enough or you hear a solid
tone from Reverse Sensing System, bring the vehicle to a complete stop
and move the gearshift to D (Drive). The message center will now
display PULL FORWARD USE CAUTION followed by a chime.
When you determine the vehicle is far enough forward or a solid tone
from Forward Sensing System (if equipped) is heard, bring the vehicle to
a complete stop and move the gearshift to R (Reverse). The message
center may display BACK UP SLOWLY USE CAUTION followed by a
chime. The system may offer subsequent backward and forward
maneuvers before proceeding to the finish phase.
APA Finished
When Active Park Assist has completed the automated steering, the
message center displays ACTIVE PARK FINISHED followed by a chime.
The driver is responsible to assess and correct as necessary the final
parking position and put the vehicle in P (Park).
The system can also be deactivated at any time by the following:
• Pressing the APA control switch.
• Grabbing the steering wheel.
• Exceeding a vehicle speed of 18 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds during
Active Park Searching.
Driving
254
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Exceeding a vehicle speed of 6 mph (10 km/h) during automatic
steering.
• Deactivating the AdvanceTrac System or the system has activated on a
slippery or loose surface.
• ABS activation or failure.
• Any door (except the driver’s door) opens.
• Something touching the steering wheel.
If a fault is present in the system, the message ACTIVE PARK FAULT
will be displayed followed by a chime. Contact an authorized dealer to
have your vehicle serviced.
The system should not be used if:
• A foreign object (i.e. bike rack, trailer, etc.) is attached to the front or
rear of the vehicle or at another location close to the sensors.
• The front bumper or side sensors are damaged (i.e. in a collision) or
obstructed by a foreign object (i.e. front bumper cover).
• A mini-spare tire is used
Troubleshooting
Why isn’t APA searching for a parking space?
• You may have deactivated the AdvanceTrac System.
• One of the doors (except the driver’s door) may not be securely
closed.
Why doesn’t APA offer a particular parking space?
• Something may be contacting the front bumper or side sensors. Clear
any material stuck to the sensors.
• There may not be enough room to maneuver the vehicle into the
space. Remember, there needs to be enough space on the opposite
side of the vehicle to allow the front of the vehicle to swing out as you
back into the space.
• The vehicle is not driven close enough to the parking space, less than
60 inches [1.5 m] from neighboring parked vehicles.
• The vehicle is driven too close to the side objects (e.g. less than
16 inches [41 cm] from neighboring parked vehicles).
Why doesn’t APA position the vehicle where I want in the space?
• You may be driving in Reverse. APA can only look for a parking space
while moving forward.
Driving
255
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• There may be an irregular curb along the parking space. APA might
not be able to align the vehicle to curbs that are damaged, very
shallow or covered with material such as debris, leaves, snow, or tarps.
• The vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned
appropriately.
• The vehicle was steered more that usual while driving by the space.
APA performs best when you drive the same distance from the
parking space the entire length of the space.
• The tires may not be installed and maintained correctly. For example,
one or more tires may not be inflated correctly, may not be of the
same size, or may not be authorized for use on this vehicle.
• The vehicle had a repair or alteration that is not authorized by the
manufacturer.
• One of the parked vehicles has a high altitude attachment (i.e. salt
sprayer, snow plow, moving truck high bed, etc.) High altitude
attachments may not be detected by the system.
• The parking space length or parked objects position have changed
after the vehicle has passed the parking space.
• The temperature around your vehicle changed quickly such as you
just drove from a heated garage into the cold or just left a car wash.
As a result, the outside air temperature displayed in the vehicle may
not be close enough to the actual temperature. APA relies on a
correctly sensing the temperature outside for precisely positioning the
vehicle.
BLIND SPOT MIRRORS (IF EQUIPPED)
Blind spot mirrors have an
integrated convex spotter mirror
built into the upper outboard corner
of the outside mirrors. They are
designed to assist the driver by
increasing visibility along the side of
the vehicle. For more information on
your side view mirrors, refer to
Exterior Mirrors in the Driver
Controls chapter.
Driving
256
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving with blind spot mirrors
Before a lane change, check the
main mirror first, then check the
blind spot mirror. If no vehicles are
present in the blind spot mirror and
the traffic in the adjacent lane is at
a safe distance, signal that you are
going to change lanes. Glance over
your shoulder to verify traffic is
clear, and carefully change lanes.
When the approaching vehicle is at
a distance, its image is small and
near the inboard edge of the main
mirror. As the vehicle approaches,
the image becomes larger and
begins to move outboard across the
main mirror (1). As the vehicle
approaches its image will transition
from the main mirror and begin to
appear in the blind spot mirror (2).
As the vehicle leaves the blind spot
mirror it will transition to the driver’s peripheral field of view (3).
WARNING: Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they
appear.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a full-time All Wheel Drive (AWD)
system. The AWD system is an active system, meaning it not only
responds to wheel slip between the front and rear axles but also has the
ability to anticipate wheel slip and transfer torque to the rear wheels
before slip occurs. The AWD system is active all the time and requires no
input from the operator.
All components of the AWD system are sealed for life and require no
maintenance.
Note: When an AWD system fault is present, the warning CHECK AWD
will display in the message center. The AWD system is not functioning
correctly and defaulted to front wheel drive. When this warning is
displayed, have your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer
3
2
1
Driving
257
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If your vehicle is equipped with AWD, a spare tire of a different size
other than the tire provided should never be used. If the spare tire is
installed, the AWD system may disable automatically and enter front
wheel drive only mode to protect driveline components. This condition
may be indicated by an AWD OFF message in the message center (see
Message center section in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more
information). If there is an AWD OFF message in the message center
from using the spare tire, this indicator should turn off after reinstalling
the repaired or replaced normal road tire and driving a short distance. It
is recommended to reinstall the repaired or replaced road tire as soon as
possible. Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front and rear axles
could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and default to front
wheel drive or damage the AWD system.
Note: The AWD OFF message may also be displayed in the message
center if the AWD system has overheated and defaulted to front wheel
drive. This condition may occur if the vehicle was operated in extreme
conditions with excessive wheel slip, such as deep sand. To resume
normal AWD function as soon as possible, stop the vehicle in a safe
location and allow it to idle. The AWD OFF message will turn off when
the system cools and normal AWD function returns.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off-road use. The AWD
feature gives your vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in which
driving surfaces are relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise
similar to normal on-road driving conditions. Operating your vehicle
under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive
stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your
warranty.
Driving on slippery surfaces with AWD vehicles
AWD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough roads and have operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the highway.
When driving at slow speeds off-highway under high outside
temperatures, use a low gear when possible. A lower gear operation will
maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to
protect overheating of the engine.
Basic operating principles
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
Driving
258
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or rollover. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
If your vehicle gets stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Control™, it may be beneficial
to disengage the Traction Control™ system while attempting to rock the
vehicle.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Switch the ignition off and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
Driving
259
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle (i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency). Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
AWD Systems (if equipped)
AWD uses all four wheels to power the vehicle. This increases traction,
enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand under high outside
temperatures, use a low gear when possible. Lower gear operation will
maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to
protect overheating of the engine.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
Driving
260
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Mud and water
If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake
capability may be limited.
When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher
than the bottom of the wheel rims (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the
ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the engine, transmission, AWD system components or axles are
submerged in water, their fluids should be checked and changed, if
necessary.
Driving through deep water may damage the engine or
transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant and
PTU (Power Transfer Unit) lubricant should be checked and changed if
necessary.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving
261
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, Do not try to turn around because you might roll
over. It is better to back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually
shift to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. The front wheels have
to be turning in order to steer the
vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore apply the brakes steadily. Do
not “pump” the brakes.
Driving on snow and ice
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause transmission damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Driving
262
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an AWD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Since
your vehicle is equipped with a four wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS),
do not “pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter
for additional information on the operation of the anti-lock brake system.
WARNING: If you are driving in slippery conditions that require
tire chains or cables, then it is critical that you drive cautiously.
Keep speeds down, allow for longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control
which can lead to serious injury or death. If the rear end of the vehicle
slides while cornering, steer in the direction of the slide until you
regain control of the vehicle.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder or luggage racks).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-highway usage.
Driving
263
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is
not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.
Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
Driving
264
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Getting roadside assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24–hours, seven days a week
• for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your Owner Guide portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit)
• battery jump start
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of
gasoline or 5 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel
delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a
12-month period.
• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
• towing – Ford/Mercury/Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56.3 km) of the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56.3 km) from the disablement
location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 35 miles (56.3 km).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide
for information on:
• coverage period
• exact fuel amounts
Roadside Emergencies
265
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• towing of your disabled vehicle
• emergency travel expense reimbursement
• travel planning benefits
In Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you may
purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
found in the Customer Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford, Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside
Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673.
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1-800-665-2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles. To obtain reimbursement information, U.S.
Ford, Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1–800–665–2006.
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
The hazard flasher control is located
on the instrument panel above the
climate controls and below the
audio controls. The hazard flashers
will operate when the ignition is in
any position or if the key is not in
the ignition.
Press in the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will
flash. Press the flasher control again to turn them off. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
Roadside Emergencies
266
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF
In the event of a moderate to severe collision, this vehicle is equipped
with a fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the
engine. Not every impact will cause a shut-off.
Note: If your vehicle has the push button start system, press the
stop/start button twice to reactivate the fuel system.
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision due to this feature, you may
restart your vehicle by doing the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the off position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the on position.
In some instances the vehicle may not restart the first time you try to
restart and may take one additional attempt.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks
after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected
by an authorized dealer after any collision.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
15
Roadside Emergencies
267
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
Cartridge
maxi
fuses
Fuse link
cartridge
2A Grey Grey — — —
3A Violet Violet — — —
4A Pink Pink — — —
5A Tan Tan — — —
7.5A Brown Brown — — —
10A Red Red — — —
15A Blue Blue — — —
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue
25A Natural Natural — — —
30A Green Green Green Pink Pink
40A — — Orange Green Green
50A — — Red Red Red
60A — — Blue Yellow Yellow
70A — — Tan — Brown
80A — — Natural Black Black
Roadside Emergencies
268
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located under the instrument panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
1 30A Right rear window
2 15A Not used (spare)
3 15A Driver seat control/lumbar
4 30A Right front window
5 10A Brake-shift interlock (BSI),
keypad illumination
6 20A Turn signals, hazards
7 10A Low beam headlamps (left)
8 10A Low beam headlamps (right)
Roadside Emergencies
269
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
9 15A Courtesy lamps
10 15A Illumination switch, Puddle lamps
11 10A All wheel d rive (AWD)
12 7.5A Passive entry/passive start
(PEPS) module
13 5A Memory/seats/mirrors/steering
column, keypad, Driver zone
module
14 10A Center information display, SYNC威
, GPS
15 10A Climate control
16 15A Electronic finish panel (EFP),
Ambient lighting
17 20A Global windows, door locks and
trunk release (less PEPS)
18 20A Dual heated rear seat module
(DHRSM) (battery)
19 25A Not used (spare)
20 15A Diagnostic connector
21 15A Fog lamps
22 15A Park lamps, License lamps
23 15A High beam headlamps
24 20A Horn
25 10A Demand lamps
26 10A Cluster/Heads up display
27 20A Ignition Switch, PEPS
28 5A Radio mute, Radio start signal
29 5A Instrument panel cluster
(run/start)
30 5A Not used (spare)
31 10A Auto high beam controller, Heads
up display
Roadside Emergencies
270
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
32 10A Restraint control module
33 10A Adaptive Lighting
34 5A AdvanceTrac, Adaptive cruise
control module, Electronic power
assist steering
35 10A AWD, DHRSM, Absolute steering
angle switch, Park aid (run/start)
36 5A Passive anti-theft system (PATS)
module
37 10A Not used (spare)
38 20A Amplifier (THX or 6 channel)
39 20A Radio/Navigation
40 20A Amplifier (THX or 2 channel)
41 15A Delayed Accessory
42 10A Not used (spare)
43 10A Rear window defroster relay, Rain
sensor
44 10A Not used (spare)
45 5A Wiper relay and module, Blower
relay
46 7.5A Occupant classification sensor
(OCS), Electronic finish panel,
Climate control
47 30A Circuit
Breaker
Not used
48 — Delayed accessory relay
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
Roadside Emergencies
271
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace
the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
1 80A** Passenger compartment fuse
panel power
2 80A** Passenger compartment fuse
panel power
3 — Not used
4 30A** Front wipers
5 30A** Passenger power seat
6 20A** Cigar lighter
7 — Not used
8 30A** Moon roof
Roadside Emergencies
272
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
9 40A** Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
pump
10 30A** Starter relay
11 30A** Powertrain control module (PCM)
relay
12 20A** ABS valve
13 15A* Adapt cruise
14 10A* Brake on/off switch
15 15A* Auto high beam
16 20A* Left high intensity discharge
(HID) headlamp
17 10A* Alternator sense
18 — Not used
19 20A** Instrument panel power point
20 40A** Rear window defroster
21 20A** Console power point
22 30A** Front heated/cooled seats
23 7.5A* PCM Keep alive power, Canister
vent
24 10A* A/C clutch relay
25 20A* Right HID headlamp
26 10A* Backup relay
27 15A* Fuel pump
28 60A** Cooling fan (3.7L V6 engine)
80A** Cooling fan (3.5L V6 engine)
29 30A** Left rear window
30 30A** Left front window
31 — Not used
32 30A** Driver seat module
33 40A** Passive entry/passive start
(PEPS) run/start relay
34 — Not used
Roadside Emergencies
273
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
35 40A** Front A/C blower motor
36 20A* Passenger compartment fuse
panel run/start
37 10A* PCM run/start
38 5A* Delayed accessory
39 Diode Fuel pump diode
40 Diode One-touch integrated start (OTIS)
diode
41 G8VA relay A/C clutch
42 G8VA relay Fuel pump
43 G8VA relay Backup
44 G8VA relay Auto high beam
45 — Not used
46 15A* Vehicle power 2 (PCM), Vehicle
power 3 (PCM)
47 15A* PCM Vehicle power 1
48 15A* Vehicle power4–Ignition coils
49 10A* Heated mirrors
50 Half ISO relay Blower motor relay
51 Half ISO relay Fog deactivation
52 Half ISO relay Starter relay
53 Half ISO relay Adaptive cruise control (stop
lamps)
54 — Not used
55 Half ISO relay Wiper relay
56 Half ISO relay HBL relay
57 — Not used
58 — Not used
59 — Not used
60 — Not used
61 — Not used
62 — Not used
Roadside Emergencies
274
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
63 Half ISO relay Run/start relay
64 Half ISO relay PCM relay
65 — Not used
66 — Not used
* Mini Fuse **Cartridge Fuse
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving:
• do not brake heavily.
• gradually decrease the vehicle’s speed.
• hold the steering wheel firmly.
• slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will
illuminate when the spare is in use. To restore the full functionality of
the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage
to the TPMS sensor, refer to Changing tires with TPMS in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter. Replace the spare tire with a road tire as
soon as possible.
WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire
Pressure Monitoring System and should not be used.
WARNING: Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for important
information. If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it
will no longer function.
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
Roadside Emergencies
275
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for
temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by
Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be
replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Tow a trailer
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
Roadside Emergencies
276
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and
seek service as soon as possible.
Stopping and securing the vehicle
1. Park on a level surface, set the
parking brake and activate hazard
flashers.
2. Place gearshift lever in P (Park)
and switch engine off.
Roadside Emergencies
277
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Removing the spare tire and jack
1. Lift the trunk cargo cover, and
remove the wing nut that secures
the spare tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
2. Lift and remove the spare tire
from the trunk.
3. Remove the second wing nut that
secures the jack retention bracket
by turning it counterclockwise,
remove the jack kit from the
vehicle.
4. Remove the jack and the wrench
from the felt bag. Fold down the
wrench socket to use to loosen the
lug nuts and to operate the jack.
Tire change procedure
WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the
transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or
slipping off the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park).
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure to place the transmission in P (Park), set
the parking brake and block (in both directions) the wheel that is
diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to the tire
being changed.
WARNING: If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else
could be seriously injured.
Roadside Emergencies
278
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
1. Block the diagonally opposite
wheel.
2. Remove wheel cover (if
equipped) with the lug wrench tip
and loosen each wheel lug nut
one-half turn counterclockwise but
do not remove them until the wheel
is raised off the ground.
Roadside Emergencies
279
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. Align the slot on top of the jack
with the sheet metal flange
indicated by the jack locator triangle
next to the tire you are changing.
Turn the jack handle clockwise until
the wheel is completely off the
ground.
Note: DO NOT LIFT ON THE
PLASTIC MOLDING, as this could
damage molding. ONLY LIFT ON
THE SHEET METAL NOTCH.
WARNING: To lessen the
risk of personal injury, do
not put any part of your body
under the vehicle while changing a
tire. Do not start the engine when
your vehicle is on the jack. The
jack is only meant for changing
the tire.
4. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
5. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
6. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
7. Remove the jack and fully tighten
the lug nuts in the order shown.
Refer to Wheel lug nut torque
specifications later in this chapter
for the proper lug nut torque
specification.
8. Install the wheel cover (if
equipped). The wheel cover will
only install if the Ford/Mercury logo
is aligned over the valve stem on the
wheel.
1
43
25
Roadside Emergencies
280
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Stowing the tire and jack
1. Fully collapse the jack, fold the
lug wrench socket into the handle
and place the jack and wrench into
the felt bag as shown. Place the
extension bolt into the external
pocket of the felt bag. Take care to
position the jack as shown to ensure
that the locating holes in the jack
base can be placed on the locating
tabs of the jack mounting bracket in
the spare tire tub.
2. Securely close the wrench compartment and the jack bag using the
VELCRO威 strips.
3. Place the jack kit on the angled bracket in the spare tire tub, using
the locating tabs to position the jack correctly.
4. Insert the straight end of the jack
retention bracket through the eyelet
of the angled bracket and swing the
retention bracket over the jack. With
the jack in place, place the end of
the retention bracket over the
threaded stud in the trunk floor and
secure it with the plastic wing nut.
Roadside Emergencies
281
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you are stowing the flat tire:
1. Remove the extension bolt from
the exterior pocket of the felt bag.
2. Install the jack as shown in
Step 4 under Stowing the tire and
jack.
3. Screw the extension bolt onto the
threaded stud of the jack retention
bracket.
4. With the temporary spare tire on
the vehicle, place the flat tire in the spare tire well with the wheel facing
up.
5. Safely secure the wheel by screwing the large wing nut onto the
extension bolt.
If you are stowing the temporary spare tire, place the tire over the
jack and secure it with the large wing nut.
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 100 miles (160 km)
after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel
removal, etc.).
Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque*
lb.ft. N•m
1/2-20 UNF 100 135
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with
the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct
metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in
motion, resulting in loss of control.
Roadside Emergencies
282
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole
prior to installation. If there is
visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole,
remove loose particles by wiping
with clean rag and apply grease.
Apply grease only to the wheel pilot
hole surface by smearing a “dime”
(1 square cm) sized glob of grease
around the wheel pilot surface (1)
with end of finger. DO NOT apply
grease to lugnut/stud holes or
wheel-to-brake surfaces.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
If you have run out of fuel and need to refill the vehicle with a portable
fuel container, see Running out of fuel in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter for proper fuel filling method using a portable
fuel container and the included fuel filler funnel. Do not insert the
nozzle of portable fuel containers or any type of aftermarket funnels into
the Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system as it can be damaged. You must
use the included funnel in such circumstances.
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers
or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel™ system. This could
damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto
the ground instead of filling the tank, all of which could result in
serious personal injury.
JUMP STARTING
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if
exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could
result in injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission
vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission may cause transmission damage.
Roadside Emergencies
283
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
+
–
+
–
Roadside Emergencies
284
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
Roadside Emergencies
285
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system.
Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker
covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding
points.
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
+
–
+
–
Roadside Emergencies
286
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Removing the jumper cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
Roadside Emergencies
287
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
Roadside Emergencies
288
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor
Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure.
On FWD vehicles, if your vehicle is to be towed from the front, ensure
proper wheel lift equipment is used to raise the front wheels off the
ground. The rear wheels can be left on the ground when towed in this
fashion.
If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear using wheel lift equipment, it
is recommended that the front wheels (drive wheels) be placed on a
dolly to prevent damage to the automatic transmission.
On AWD vehicles, it is required that your vehicle be towed with a wheel
lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground to
prevent damage to the automatic transmission, AWD system or vehicle.
Roadside Emergencies
289
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
Emergency towing
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle (without access
to wheel dollies, car hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle) your
vehicle (regardless of transmission powertrain configuration) can be flat
towed (all wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward
direction.
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral). Refer to Brake shift interlock
in the Driving chapter for specific instructions if you cannot move the
gear shift lever into N (Neutral).
• Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).
Roadside Emergencies
290
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized
Ford, Lincoln, or Mercury dealer. While any authorized dealer handling
your vehicle line will provide warranty service, we recommend you
return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and/or
equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all
warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
Away from home
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed
below to find the nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are available online at
www.genuineservice.com.
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code
• Owner Guides
• Maintenance Schedules
• Recalls
• Ford Extended Service Plans
• Ford Genuine Accessories
• Service specials and promotions.
Customer Assistance
291
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
In Canada:
Mailing address (Ford vehicles)
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca
Mailing address (Lincoln vehicles)
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
Online
www.lincolncanada.com
Additional assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center
In order to help you serve you better, please have the following
information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the authorized dealer and city where located
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading
In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing
remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final
repair attempt in some states.
Customer Assistance
292
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
Customer Assistance
293
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step
procedure outlined on the first page of the Customer Assistance section,
you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact
both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of
the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation and your
claim is eligible, you may participate in the arbitration process. An
arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case
in an informal setting before an impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing.
You are not bound by the decision, but should you choose to accept the
BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford must abide by the accepted decision as
well. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually
decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below,
please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked
for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be
mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB
along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the
claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford
Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
Customer Assistance
294
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
Customer Assistance
295
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Customer Assistance
296
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by writing to:
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
Service Publications CHQ202
The Canadian Road
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, ON, Canada
L6J 5E4
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510.
Customer Assistance
297
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A), which is available
from your authorized dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42) which is available from your authorized dealer.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
Exterior chrome
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• Use Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from
your authorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to
clean bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a
few minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
• Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads
as they can scratch the chrome surface.
• After polishing chrome bumpers, apply a coating of Motorcraft
Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental
effects.
Cleaning
298
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WAXING
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use Motorcraft Premium
Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), which is available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
PAINT CHIPS
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A),
which is available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brake
dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your authorized dealer.
Cleaning
299
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (CXC-66-A).
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug
well, or the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
3.7L V6 ENGINE
Cleaning
300
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3.5L V6 ECOBOOST ENGINE
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your authorized dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellent
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your authorized dealer.
Cleaning
301
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32-A),
available from your authorized dealer. This washer fluid contains
special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot
wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car
wash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear
worn or do not function properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause
damage to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.
INSTRUMENT PANEL/INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster lens with a
clean, damp, white cotton cloth, then use a clean and dry white cotton
cloth to dry these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
Cleaning
302
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white cotton cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution. If the spot cannot
be completely cleaned by this method, the area may be cleaned using a
commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive
interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product
to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled
area–allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side
airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14). In Canada, use
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (CXC-101).
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the
vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do
not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products
could contaminate the side-airbag system and affect performance of
the side airbag in a collision.
Cleaning
303
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
LEATHER SEATS
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
• For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For
more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water
solution. In Canada, use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (CXC-93). Dry the
area with a soft cloth.
• If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and
water solution, the leather may be cleaned using a commercially
available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality
products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These
quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality
materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use
the following products or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish (ZC-8-A)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
Cleaning
304
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A)
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-A)
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)
Cleaning
305
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty
Guide/Customer Information Guide to find out which parts and
services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes)
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the engine on
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
Maintenance and Specifications
306
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located at the bottom
of the instrument panel near the
steering column.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
release the auxiliary latch using the
handle that is located under the
front passenger side of the hood.
3. Lift the hood until the lift
cylinders hold it open.
Maintenance and Specifications
307
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.7L V6 Duratec engine
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Engine coolant reservoir
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Battery
5. Power distribution box
6. Air filter assembly
7. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Engine oil filler cap
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
Maintenance and Specifications
308
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3.5L V6 EcoBoost engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Brake fluid reservoir
3. Battery
4. Power distribution box
5. Air filter assembly
6. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick (out of view)
7. Engine oil dipstick
8. Engine oil filler cap
9. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
Maintenance and Specifications
309
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Engine shield
Some vehicles may be equipped
with an aero-shield under the
engine. This shield needs to be
removed for service, including oil
and filter changes. It is secured with
four screws.
WINDSHIELD WASHER
FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specification WSB-M8B16-A2.
Do not use any special washer fluid
such as windshield water repellent
type fluid or bug wash. They may
cause squeaking, chatter noise,
streaking and smearing. Refer to the Maintenance product
specifications and capacities section in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below
40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure
to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or
accident.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
Maintenance and Specifications
310
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm
away from the glass.
2. Squeeze the locking tabs to
release the blade from the arm and
pull the blade away from the arm to
remove it.
3. Attach the new blade to the arm and snap it into place.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield. Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
Maintenance and Specifications
311
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5. Locate and carefully remove the
engine oil level dipstick.
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again.
• If the oil level is within this
range, the oil level is acceptable.
DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below this
mark, engine oil must be added
to raise the level within the
normal operating range.
• If required, add engine oil to the
engine. Refer to Adding engine
oil in this chapter.
Maintenance and Specifications
312
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Do not overfill the engine
with oil. Oil levels above this
mark may cause engine
damage. If the engine is
overfilled, some oil must be
removed from the engine by an
authorized dealer.
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal operating range, add
only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the
engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the
opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick.
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
until it stops.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.
Maintenance and Specifications
313
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine and engine’s warranty, use Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
or an equivalent SAE 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification
WSS-M2C930-A. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and
durability performance meeting all requirements for your
vehicle’s engine. Refer to Maintenance product specifications and
capacities later in this chapter for more information.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in the scheduled maintenance information.
Ford production and Motorcraft replacement oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or
another with equivalent performance for your engine application.
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
Maintenance and Specifications
314
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the
battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide
proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or
battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician
immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
Maintenance and Specifications
315
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with
the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for
at least one minute.
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The coolant
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water,
L
E
A
D
RETURN
RECYCLE
Maintenance and Specifications
316
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant concentration
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester. The level of
coolant should be maintained at the FULL COLD level or within the
COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add
coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50/50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
• Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• Proper function of calibrated gauges.
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
• The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level or within the
COLD FILL RANGE as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
• Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval
schedules.
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Maintenance and Specifications
317
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot.
Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts.
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the windshield.
• Do not mix coolants. Add the coolant type originally equipped
in your vehicle. Refer to Maintenance product specifications and
capacities in this chapter.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants/additives
as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and/or heating systems.
This damage would not be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the FULL COLD level. For all other vehicles which have a
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
Maintenance and Specifications
318
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the
engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by
following these steps:
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture, to
within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir.
If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the radiator
until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer
to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34°F/–36°C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.
Maintenance and Specifications
319
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34°F [–36°C]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
Maintenance and Specifications
320
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
What you should know about fail-safe cooling (if equipped)
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot)
area.
• The coolant temperature warning light
will illuminate.
• The service engine soon
indicator will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to
increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine
damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
Maintenance and Specifications
321
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility.
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to a
service facility as soon as possible.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel™ “no cap”
fuel system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death
if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a
cancer-causing agent.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
refueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
Maintenance and Specifications
322
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent
injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not
be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and
never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never
smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is
pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.
Maintenance and Specifications
323
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Refueling
WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause
severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
• Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
• Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
• Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
• Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
• Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;
• Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump
fuel.
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system
Your fuel tank is equipped with an Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel filler
system. This allows you to simply open the fuel filler door and insert the
fuel filler nozzle into the fuel system. The Easy Fuel™ system is
self-sealing and protected against dust, dirt, water and snow/ice.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the fuel filler door.
3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system. Pump fuel
as normal.
4. After you are done pumping fuel, wait about five seconds before
slowly removing the fuel filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain
back into the fuel tank and not spill onto the vehicle.
Maintenance and Specifications
324
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if overfilling the fuel tank. Do
not overfill the tank to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the fuel
filler nozzle. The overfilled fuel may run down the drain located within
the fuel filler housing and to the ground.
If the Check Fuel Fill Inlet message comes on, the fuel fill inlet may not
have properly closed. The inlet may have stuck open or debris may be
preventing the inlet from fully closing. At the next opportunity, safely
pull off the road, turn off the engine, open the fuel filler door and
remove any visible debris from the fuel fill opening. Insert either the fuel
fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel (see Refilling with a portable fuel
container for funnel location) provided with the vehicle several times to
dislodge any debris and/or allow the inlet to close properly. If this action
corrects the problem, the Check Fuel Fill Inlet message may not reset
immediately. It may take several driving cycles for the Check Fuel Fill
Inlet message to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up
(after four or more hours with the engine off) followed by city/highway
driving. Continuing to drive with the Check Fuel Fill Inlet message on
may cause the service engine soon lamp to turn on as well.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel™ “no cap”
fuel system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.
Choosing the right fuel
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum
of 10% ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85), diesel, methanol, leaded
fuel or any other fuel. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and
could damage your vehicle.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause
powertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and repairs may not
be covered under warranty.
Octane recommendations
3.7L V6 engine
Your vehicle will run normally on 87 octane regular fuel. Premium fuel
will provide improved performance.
Maintenance and Specifications
325
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3.5L V6 EcoBoost engine
Your vehicle is designed to run on regular fuel with an octane rating of
87 or higher. For best overall performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The performance gained by using
premium fuel will be most noticeable in hot weather or in severe duty
applications such as towing a trailer.
Some stations offer fuels posted as
⬙Regular⬙ with an octane rating
below 87, particularly in high
altitude areas. Fuels with octane
levels below 87 are not
recommended for either engine. Do not be concerned if your engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it knocks heavily while you are
using fuel with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized
dealer to prevent any engine damage.
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. If the problems
persist, see your dealer or a qualified service technician.
It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system.
Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your
fuel may not be covered by your warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-Wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-Wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-Wide Fuel Charter.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
87
(R+M)/2 METHOD
Maintenance and Specifications
326
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal.
• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than
1 gallon (3.8L) may be required.
• The service engine soon
indicator may come on. For more
information on the service engine soon indicator, refer to Warning
lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Refilling with a portable fuel container
With the Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system, use the following directions
when filling from a portable fuel container:
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers
or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel™ system. This could
damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto
the ground instead of filling the tank, which could result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not try to pry open or push open the Easy
Fuel™ system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you or others.
When filling the vehicle’s fuel tank from a portable fuel container, use the
funnel included with the vehicle.
1. After lifting the trunk cargo
cover, locate the white plastic
funnel. It is attached to the rear,
lower edge of the spare tire
compartment.
Maintenance and Specifications
327
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Slowly insert the funnel into the
Easy Fuel™ system.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container.
4. When done, clean the funnel or properly dispose of it. Extra funnels
can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose
of the funnel. Do not use aftermarket funnels; they will not work with
the Easy Fuel™ system and can damage it. The included funnel has
been specially designed to work safely with your vehicle.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more
accurate measurement after 2,000 miles–3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000
km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
Maintenance and Specifications
328
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Maintenance and Specifications
329
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs. Unnecessary
shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in scheduled maintenance information.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
Maintenance and Specifications
330
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski racks) may reduce
fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA fuel economy estimates
Every new vehicle should have a sticker on the window called the
Monroney Label which contains EPA fuel economy estimates. Contact
your authorized dealer if the Monroney Label is not supplied with your
vehicle. The EPA fuel economy estimates should be your guide for the
fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles. Your fuel economy may
vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
Maintenance and Specifications
331
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your Warranty Guide/Customer Information Guide for
complete emission warranty information.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the service
engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected
a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine
soon
indicator to illuminate. Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
Maintenance and Specifications
332
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed. See Easy Fuel™
“no cap” fuel system in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon
indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway
driving. No additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon
indicator remains on, have your vehicle
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine soon
indicator on can
result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M
test if the service engine soon
indicator is on or not working
properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems have not been properly
checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered not ready for I/M testing.
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does not
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. Refer to the On board
diagnostics (OBD-II) description in this chapter.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine
soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing; if the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
Maintenance and Specifications
333
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by
20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle
periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.
POWER STEERING FLUID (EXCEPT ECOBOOST ENGINE)
Refer to scheduled maintenance information.
1. Start the engine and let it run
until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant
temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area
between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the
steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN
and MAX lines. Do not add fluid if the level is in this range.
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines. Be
sure to put the cap back on the reservoir. Refer to Maintenance
product specifications and capacities in this chapter for the proper
fluid type.
Maintenance and Specifications
334
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
BRAKE FLUID
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels between the MIN and
MAX lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating
range, the performance of the
system could be compromised; seek
service from your authorized dealer
immediately.
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is warmed up
(approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic
during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be
turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before
checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick. (For vehicles with the
EcoBoost engine, move the air filter assembly aside to access the
transmission dipstick. See Changing the air filter element for more
information).
Maintenance and Specifications
335
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated areas for normal operating temperature.
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid
level is at the bottom of the
dipstick.
Correct fluid level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating
temperature 180°F-200°F (82°C-93°C) on a level surface. The normal
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles
(30 km) of driving.
The transmission fluid should be
within the cross-hatch area if at
normal operating temperature
180°F-200°F (82°C-93°C).
High fluid level
Fluid levels above the safe range
may result in transmission failure.
An overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the
Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this
chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint
(250 ml) increments through the
filler tube until the level is correct.
Maintenance and Specifications
336
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid
should be removed by an authorized
dealer.
An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement concerns
and/or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
AIR FILTER
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element
listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
Maintenance and Specifications
337
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Changing the air filter element
3.7L V6 engine
3.5L V6 EcoBoost engine
1. Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover.
2. Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing.
3. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing.
4. Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or
debris and to ensure good sealing.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter housing and cover. This could cause
filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly
seated.
Maintenance and Specifications
338
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
6. Replace the air filter housing
cover and secure the clamps. Be
sure that the air cleaner cover tabs
are engaged into the slots of the air
cleaner housing.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component 3.7L V6 engine 3.5L V6 EcoBoost
engine
Air filter element FA-1884 FA-1884
Battery BXT-65-650 BXT-65-650
Oil filter FL-500-S FL-500-S
Spark Plugs
1
1
For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
Maintenance and Specifications
339
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MAINTENANCE PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES
Items Capacity
Ford Part Name or
equivalent
Ford Part Number /
Ford Specification
Brake fluid
Between MAX and
MIN on reservoir
Motorcraft High
Performance DOT 3
Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
PM-1-C /
WSS-M6C62-A or
WSS-M6C65-A1
Door latch, hood latch,
auxiliary hood latch,
seat tracks, trunk and
liftgate latches
— Multi-Purpose Grease
XG-4 or XL-5 /
ESA-M1C93-B
Lock cylinders —
Motorcraft Penetrating
and Lock Lubricant
XL-1 /
None
Automatic transmission
fluid (6F50)
9.4 quarts (8.9L)
1
Motorcraft
MERCON威 LV ATF
2
XT-10-QLV /
MERCON威 LV
Automatic transmission
fluid (6F55)
10.2 quarts
(9.7L)
1
Rear differential (AWD)
fluid
2.4 pints (1.15L)
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90
Premium Rear Axle
Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL /
WSP-M2C197-A
Power Transfer Unit
(PTU) fluid (AWD)
5
18 ounces (0.53L)
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140
Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL /
WSL-M2C192-A
Maintenance and Specifications
340
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Items Capacity
Ford Part Name or
equivalent
Ford Part Number /
Ford Specification
Engine oil 5.5 quarts (5.2L)
•Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Premium Synthetic
Blend Motor Oil (US)
•Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Full Synthetic Motor Oil
(US)
•Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
•Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Synthetic Motor Oil
(Canada)
3
•XO-5W20-QSP (US)
•XO-5W20-QFS (US)
•CXO-5W20- LSP12
(Canada)
•CXO-5W20-LFS12
(Canada) /
WSS-M2C930-A and API
Certification Mark
Engine coolant
11.1 quarts
(10.5L)
(3.7L engine)
Motorcraft Specialty
Green Engine Coolant
4
V C-10-A (US)
CVC-10-A (Canada) /
WSS-M97B55-A
11.4 quarts
(10.8L)
(3.5L EcoBoost
engine)
Power steering fluid
(except EcoBoost
engine)
Between MAX and
MIN on reservoir
Motorcraft
MERCON威 VATF
XT-5-QM /
MERCON威 V
Maintenance and Specifications
341
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Items Capacity
Ford Part Name or
equivalent
Ford Part Number /
Ford Specification
Windshield washer fluid
Top-off fluid as
needed
Motorcraft Premium
Windshield Washer
Concentrate
ZC-32-A /
WSB-M8B16-A2
Fuel tank
19.0 gallons
(71.9L)
——
1
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
2
Automatic transmissions that require MERCON威 LV should only use MERCON威 LV fluid. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information to determine the correct service interval. Use of any fluid
other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
3
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
4
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. To determine your vehicle’s coolant type
(color), check your coolant reservoir.
5
See your authorized dealer for fluid level checking or filling.
Maintenance and Specifications
342
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ENGINE DATA
Engine 3.7L V6 engine 3.5L V6 EcoBoost engine
Cubic inches 226 214
Fuel
See Octane
recommendations
earlier in this chapter.
See Octane
recommendations earlier
in this chapter.
Firing order 1–4–2–5–3–6 1–4–2–5–3–6
Spark plug gap
0.052–0.056 inch
(1.32–1.42 mm)
0.033–0.037 inch (.838–
.939 mm)
Ignition system Coil on plug Coil on plug
Compression
ratio
10.3:1 10.0:1
Engine drivebelt routing
3.7L V6 engine
1. Short drivebelt is on first pulley groove closest to engine (except
vehicles with electric power assisted steering).
2. Long drivebelt is on second pulley groove farthest from engine.
Maintenance and Specifications
343
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3.5L V6 EcoBoost engine
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Compliance Certification Label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label is
located on the structure (B-Pillar)
by the trailing edge of the driver’s
door or the edge of the driver’s
door.
Maintenance and Specifications
344
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver side
instrument panel.
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
Devices and their location
3. Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Maintenance and Specifications
345
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS
You can find a transmission code on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission each code
represents.
Description Code
6F 6-Speed Automatic Transmission J
6F55 6-Speed Automatic Transmission (with
EcoBoost)
C
Maintenance and Specifications
346
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENUINE LINCOLN ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Genuine Lincoln Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local Lincoln or Ford of Canada dealer. These
quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory
is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Lincoln’s
rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will
repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Lincoln
Accessories found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component
damaged by the defective accessories. The accessories will be warranted
for whichever provides you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
Following is a list of several Genuine Lincoln Accessories. Not all
accessories are available for all models. To find out what accessories are
available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer or visit our online
store at: www.lincolnaccessories.com.
Exterior style
Moonroof deflector
Side window deflector
Splash guards
Interior style
All weather floor mats
Carpeted floor mats
Ambient lighting
Lifestyle
Ash cup / smoker’s package
Cargo organization and management
Accessories
347
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Peace of mind
Remote start
Wheel locks
Locking gas plug
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
• Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to
the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
Accessories
348
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS
More than 30 million Ford, Lincoln, and Mercury owners have discovered
the powerful protection of Ford ESP. It is the only extended service plan
backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides “peace of mind”
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Up to 500+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four, new-vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask you dealer for details.
PremiumCare – Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 500
covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered!
ExtraCare – Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech
items.
BaseCare – Covers 84 components.
PowertrainCare – Covers 29 critical components.
Ford ESP is honored by all Ford, Lincoln and Mercury Dealers in
the U.S. and Canada It’s the only extended service plan authorized and
backed by Ford Motor Company. That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service anywhere you go.
• Factory-trained technicians.
• Genuine Ford and Motorcraft威 Parts.
Rental car reimbursement
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are
eligible for rental car coverage, including Bumper-to-Bumper warranty
repairs, or manufacturer’s recalls.
Transferable coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires, you can
transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. Whenever you’re
ready to sell your car, prospective buyers may feel better about taking a
risk on your used vehicle. Ford ESP may add resale value!
Plus, exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts.
• Out-of-fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car.
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage and
emergency transportation.
Ford Extended Service Plan
349
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor – can easily exceed the
price of your Ford ESP Service Contract. With Ford ESP, you minimize
your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs.
Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle!
Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that
routinely wear out, like brakes and shocks.
The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about affording
your vehicle maintenance. It covers regular checkups, routine
inspections, preventive care and replacement of items that require
periodic attention for normal “wear”:
• Wiper blades • Brake pads and linings
• Spark plugs (except
California)
• Shock absorbers
• Clutch disc • Belts and hoses
Contact your selling Ford, Lincoln, or Mercury dealership today so they
can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving
lifestyle and budget.
Ford Extended Service Plan
350
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Ford Extended Service Plan
351
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
A
Accessory delay ..........................77
Active Park Assist .....................252
Adaptive Cruise Control .............81
AdvanceTrac ..............................234
Air cleaner filter ...............337–339
Air conditioning ....................48, 51
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ........................161, 170, 172
and child safety seats ............163
description ..............161, 170, 172
disposal ....................................175
driver airbag ............163, 171, 173
indicator light .................169, 175
operation .................163, 171, 173
passenger airbag .....163, 171, 173
side airbag ...............................170
All Wheel Drive (AWD),
driving off road .........................257
Ambient mood/lighting ...............64
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................316
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ..............................232
Anti-theft system ..............124, 132
arming the system ..................133
disarming a triggered
system .....................................134
triggering .................................134
Audio system (see Radio) .........31
Automatic transaxle
fluid, refill capacities ..............340
fluid, specification ..................340
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................240
fluid, adding ............................335
fluid, checking ........................335
Selectshift (SST) ....................242
Auxiliary input jack (Line in) ....39
B
Battery .......................................314
acid, treating emergencies .....314
jumping a disabled battery ....283
maintenance-free ....................314
replacement, specifications ...339
servicing ..................................314
Belt-Minder威 .............................156
Blind Spot Spotter Mirror ........256
Booster seats .............................189
Brakes ........................................232
anti-lock ...................................232
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................233
fluid, checking and adding ....335
fluid, refill capacities ..............340
fluid, specifications .................340
lubricant specifications ..........340
parking ....................................233
shift interlock ..........................240
Bulbs ............................................64
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....340
Car2U garage door opener .........96
Cargo cover .................................77
Cargo net ...................................103
CD ................................................31
Cell phone use ..............................8
Changing a tire .........................275
Child safety seats ......................180
Index
352
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
attaching with tether straps ..187
in front seat ............................180
in rear seat ..............................180
LATCH .....................................184
recommendations ...................178
Child safety seats - booster
seats ...........................................189
Cleaning your vehicle
engine compartment ..............300
instrument panel ....................302
interior .....................................303
plastic parts ............................301
washing ....................................298
waxing .....................................299
wheels ......................................299
wiper blades ............................301
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ......48, 51
Clock adjust
AM/FM/CD/MP3 ........................32
Collision Warning System .........249
Compass, electronic ....................71
calibration .................................72
set zone adjustment .................72
Console
overhead ....................................70
Controls
power seat ...............................138
steering column ........................89
Coolant
checking and adding ..............316
refill capacities ................320, 340
specifications ..........................340
Cooled Seats ..............................140
Cruise control
(see Speed control) ....................79
Cupholder(s) .............................145
Customer Assistance ................265
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..........................................349
Getting assistance outside the
U.S. and Canada .....................295
Getting roadside assistance ...265
Getting the service you
need .........................................291
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................296
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................295
D
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................61
Defrost
rear window ..............................48
rear window and rearview
mirrors .......................................51
windshield ...........................48, 51
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................335
engine oil .................................311
Doors
central unlocking ....................107
Driving under special
conditions ..........................259, 262
sand .........................................260
snow and ice ...........................262
through water .................261, 264
E
Electronic message center .........18
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................283
running out of fuel .........283, 326
Emission control system ..........331
Index
353
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Engine ........................................343
cleaning ...................................300
coolant .....................................316
fail-safe cooling .......................321
idle speed control ...................314
lubrication specifications .......340
refill capacities ........................340
service points ..................308–309
Engine block heater .................230
Engine oil ..................................311
change oil soon warning,
message center .......................311
checking and adding ..............311
dipstick ....................................311
filter, specifications ........313, 339
recommendations ...................313
refill capacities ........................340
specifications ..........................340
Event data recording ....................7
Exhaust fumes ..........................229
F
Fail safe cooling ........................321
Fleet MyKey programming ......129
Fluid capacities .........................340
Fog lamps ....................................57
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles
driving off road .......................258
Fuel ............................................322
calculating fuel
economy ............................20, 328
cap ...........................................324
capacity ...................................340
choosing the right fuel ...........325
comparisons with EPA fuel
economy estimates .................331
detergent in fuel .....................326
filler funnel .............................326
filling your vehicle with
fuel ...........................322, 324, 328
filter, specifications ........322, 339
improving fuel economy ........328
octane rating ...................325, 343
quality ......................................326
running out of fuel .........283, 326
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................322
Fuses ..........................................267
G
Garage door opener ....................92
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............324
Gas mileage
(see Fuel economy) .................328
Gauges .........................................17
H
Hazard flashers .........................266
Headlamps ...................................56
aiming ........................................62
autolamp system .......................56
bulb specifications ....................65
daytime running lights .............61
flash to pass ..............................61
high beam .................................58
turning on and off ....................56
Heated Seats .....................140–141
Heating
heating and air conditioning
system .................................48, 51
Homelink wireless control
system ..........................................93
Hood ..........................................307
I
Ignition ...............................224, 343
Index
354
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Illuminated visor mirror .............70
Infant seats
(see Safety seats) .....................180
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................333
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................302
cluster ........................................12
lighting up panel and
interior .......................................61
Intelligent Access Key ..............105
Intelligent Access with push
button start ...............................115
J
Jack ............................................275
positioning ...............................275
storage .....................................275
Jump-starting your vehicle ......283
K
Keyless entry system
autolock ...................................107
keypad .....................................122
locking and unlocking doors ..123
programming entry code .......122
Keys ...................................104, 126
positions of the ignition .........224
L
Lamps
autolamp system .......................56
bulb replacement
specifications chart ..................65
daytime running light ...............61
fog lamps ...................................57
headlamps .................................56
headlamps, flash to pass ..........61
instrument panel, dimming .....61
interior lamps .....................63, 65
LATCH anchors .........................184
Lights, warning and indicator ....12
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........233
Load limits .................................214
Locks
autolock ...................................107
childproof ................................111
doors ........................................106
Lubricant specifications ...........340
Lug nuts ....................................282
Lumbar support, seats .............140
M
Message center .....................18–19
english/metric button ...............23
system check button ................23
warning messages .....................23
Mirrors ...................................77–78
automatic dimming rearview
mirror ........................................78
heated ............................48, 51, 79
programmable memory ..........117
side view mirrors (power) .......78
Moon roof ....................................91
Motorcraft parts ................304, 339
MyKey ........................................129
N
Navigation system .......................47
O
Octane rating ............................325
Index
355
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................311
P
Parental MyKey
programming .............................129
Park Assist ................................252
Parking brake ............................233
Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....339
Passenger Occupant
Classification Sensor .................149
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................271
Power door locks ......................106
Power mirrors .............................78
Power point .................................73
Power steering ..........................238
fluid, checking and adding ....334
fluid, refill capacity ................340
fluid, specifications .................340
Power Windows ...........................74
Push button start system .........227
R
Radio ............................................31
6-CD in dash .............................31
Rear heated seats .....................146
Rear-view camera system .........247
Recommendations for
attaching safety restraints for
children ......................................178
Relays ........................................267
Remote entry system .......113, 115
illuminated entry ....................120
locking/unlocking doors .........116
opening the trunk ...................117
panic alarm .............................117
replacement/additional
transmitters .............................120
replacing the batteries ...........118
Reverse sensing system ...........244
Roadside assistance ..................265
S
Safety belts (see Safety
restraints) ..................147, 151–155
Safety Canopy ...................170, 172
Safety defects, reporting ..........297
Safety restraints ........147, 151–155
Belt-Minder威 ...........................156
extension assembly ................155
for adults .........................152–154
for children .............................176
Occupant Classification
Sensor ......................................149
warning light and chime ........156
Safety restraints - LATCH
anchors ......................................184
Safety seats for children ..........180
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................344
Satellite Radio Information ........44
Seats ..........................................135
child safety seats ....................180
climate control ............48, 51, 141
Cooled .....................................140
easy access/easyout feature ..143
front seats ...............................140
heated ......................................146
Heated and Cooled .................140
memory seat ...................117, 143
SecuriCode keyless entry
system ........................................122
Index
356
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ........................................124
Servicing your vehicle ..............306
Setting the clock .........................32
SOS Post Crash Alert ...............175
Spare tire
(see Changing the Tire) ...........278
Spark plugs, specifications ......339,
343
Specification chart,
lubricants ...................................340
Speed control ..............................79
Starting your vehicle ........224–226
jump starting ..........................283
push button start system .......227
Steering wheel
controls ......................................89
tilting .........................................69
Stereo
6-CD in dash .............................31
SYNC威 ..........................................47
T
Tilt steering wheel ......................69
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
Roadside Emergencies ...........275
Tires, Wheels and Loading ....208
Tires ...........................193–194, 275
alignment ................................201
care ..........................................197
changing ..........................275, 278
checking the pressure ............197
inflating ...................................195
label .........................................207
replacing ..................................199
rotating ....................................201
safety practices .......................200
sidewall information ...............203
snow tires and chains ............213
spare tire .................................275
terminology .............................194
tire grades ...............................194
treadwear ........................193, 198
Towing .......................................220
recreational towing .................222
trailer towing ..........................220
wrecker ....................................289
Transaxle
fluid, refill capacities ..............340
lubricant specifications ..........340
Transmission .............................240
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....240
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................335
Trunk .........................................112
remote release ................103, 117
Turn signal ..................................63
U
Universal garage door opener ....92
USB port ......................................41
V
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................345
Vehicle loading ..........................214
Ventilating your vehicle ...........230
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .......12
Washer fluid ..............................310
Water, Driving through .............264
Index
357
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Windows
power .........................................74
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................68
checking and adding fluid
.....310
replacing wiper blades
...........311
Wrecker towing
.........................289
Index
358
2010 MKS (mks)
Owners Guide (own2002), 1st Printing
USA (fus)
